Home

Nikon D300s Manual

1. Question Key phrase mo How do I get more information about F the battery Battery info 307 How do I keep the file number from being reset when l insert a new memory File numbersequence 277 card How do l reset file numbering to 1 How do I clean the camera or lens Cleaning the camera 357 BE Taking Photographs Question Key phrase mo How many more shots can I take with Number of exposures 38 this card remaining How do I take bigger photographs How can get more photos on the Image quality and size 68 71 memory card How do make an NEF RAW copy of the NEF RAW 294 next photo Can I control how the camera focuses Autofocus 74 Can I choose the focus point Focus point 78 How do I take a lot of photographs Release iod 86 quickly Can I change the frame advance rate Shooting speed 5 6 How do l take pictures with the self selttimeir mod 91 timer Can I take pictures under low light D without the flash I30 sensitivity ay Can the ISO sensitivity I choose be ISO sensitivity auto 98 adjusted to ensure optimal exposure control How do I freeze or blur moving objects Exposure mode 5 108 shutter priority auto How do blur background details or keep both foreground and background Exposure mode A 109 in focus aperture priority auto Question Key phrase oo Can set both shutter speed and Exposure mode fi 111 aperture manually manual Can I make photos brighter or
2. are available Option Colortemp Description White balance is adjusted AUTO Auto 3 500 automatically For best results use type 8 000 K GorDlens If built in or optional flash fires results are adjusted for flash z Incandescent 3 000 K_ Use under incandescent lighting a Fluorescent Use with Sodium vaporlamps 2 700 K Sodium vapor lighting found in sports venues Warme white 3 000 K Warm white fluorescent lights fluorescent White fluorescent 3 700 K_ White fluorescent lights Rook white 4 200 K Cool white fluorescent lights fluorescent ee 5 000 K Daylight white fluorescent lights Daylight fluorescent 6 500K Daylight fluorescent lights High temp 7200K High color temperature light sources mercury vapor i e g mercury vapor lamps Direct sunlight 5 200 K_ Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight Flash 5 400 K Use with built in or optional flash Cloudy 6 000 K Use in daylight under overcast skies G Shade 8 000 K Usein daylight with subjects in the shade EA Choose color temp 2 500 Choose color temperature from list of 10 000 K values 141 PRE Preset manual Use subject light source or existing photograph as reference for white balance M 142 All values are approximate Fine tuning set to 0 Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources If the desired results can not be achieved with auto white balanc
3. Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution m Lens aperture ring is Set ring to minimum FEE a not set to minimum aperture largest 27 blinks aperture f number lt a ca Low battery Ready a fully charg d 37 spare battery e Battery exhausted e Recharge or replace battery e Battery can notbe e Contact Nikon used authorized service representative An extremely e Replace the battery Ca ca exhausted or recharge the xxiii 22 blinks blinks rechargeable Li ion battery if the 24 battery or a third rechargeable Li ion party battery is battery is exhausted inserted either in the camera or in the optional MB D10 battery pack Camera clock is not set Set camera clock 29 blinks Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution m No lens attached or non CPU lens attached without specifying Aperture value will be AF maximum aperture displayed if maximum 195 Aperture shown in aperture is specified stops from maximum aperture Camera unable to focus Focus manually 83 blinks using autofocus Use a lower ISO 96 sensitivity In exposure mode Subject too bright P Use optional ND 354 Hi photo will be ae 5 Increase shutter 108 overexposed speed A Choose a smaller 109 aperture larger f number Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution An Us
4. To Press Description Skip back skip Press lt q to return to previous frame to skip ahead to next frame View additional k photo info kO Change photo info displayed M 207 Pause resume Pause or resume slide show Exit a e MENU End slide show and return to playback menu Exit to playback 5 End slide show and exit to full frame A 204 mode or thumbnail playback 21 216 Exit to shooting EA Press shutter release button halfway to return mode L to shooting mode The dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends Select Restart to restart or Exit to return to the playback menu 252 Restart 2s Frame interval Eit 3 The Shooting Menu Shooting Options To display the shooting menu press MENU and select the shooting menu tab MENU button SHOOTING MENU 7 slot selection slot function 12 image size a a w Lz Secondary slot functien SHOOTING MENU A Reset hooting mens Active folder 100 File naming JS Primary slot selection oF Image quality Image size Option m Shooting menu bank 254 Reset shooting menu 256 Active folder 256 File naming 258 Primary slot selection 72 Secondary slot function 72 Image quality 68 Image size 71 JPEG compression 70 NEF RAW recording 70 White balance 134 Set Picture Control 154 Manage Picture Control 160 Color
5. 3 Selecta photograph E Imave overlay T Image 1 Highlight the first photograph in the overlay To view the ea wt highlighted photograph full lt O frame press and hold the amp y button to view images in other locations press 9E and select the desired card and folder as described on page 217 Press to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display 324 4 Select the second Ba imase overlay photograph The selected image will appear as Image 1 Press gt to highlight Image 2 and repeat A steps 2 3 to select the second photo 5 set gain image 1 Image2 Preview J 4 Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing A or to select the gain for image 1 selet from values between 0 1 and 2 0 Repeat for the second image The default value is 1 0 selecting 0 5 cuts gain in half while selecting 2 0 doubles gain The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column am E KLO em 6 Highlight the Preview E Image overlay column J Image 1 Image 2 Y Press lt or P to highlight the Preview column 7 Preview the overlay E imase overlay Overlay Press A or W to highlight Overlay and press to save the overlay without displaying a preview highlight Save and press To return to Step 5 and select new photos or adjust gain press 9E 325 8 save the overlay Press while th
6. 3 Choose a flash mode Press the button and rotate the main command dial until the desired flash mode icon is displayed in the control panel 175 Main command dial Control panel 171 4 Check exposure shutter speed and aperture Press the shutter release button halfway and check shutter speed and aperture The settings available when the built in flash is raised are listed below Mode Shutter speed Aperture See page p Set automatically by camera i 1 1 1 2 106 1 250 s 60 s Set automatically 5 Value selected by user by camera 108 1 250 s 30 s 2 Set automatically by camera 1 250 s 60 s 12 Value selected Value selected by user by user 1 250 S 30 s kini btn 2 A 109 M 111 1 Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30s in slow sync slow rear curtain sync and slow sync with red eye reduction flash modes 2 Speeds as fast as 1 3 000 s are available with optional SB 900 SB 800 and SB 600 flash units when 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 281 3 Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity Consult table of flash ranges M 174 when setting aperture in A and M modes The effects of the flash can be previewed by pressing the depth of field preview button to emit a modeling preflash 289 n Take the picture Compose the photograph focus and shoot If th
7. Tutorial This section describes how to use the camera menus how to ready the camera for use and how to take your first pictures and play them back GAMO FAMOUS scrcsecssseccescccsccasseisecesseraisecescessssersscessstcrsseiseseatass 18 USIMNGiSaIMenra MCMUS aoee AR AEE EEEN anA 19 e E 21 LET E A O A O 22 Charge the Bate a certian A A Rh 22 Insertthe Battery kae nae AE AAE eA AA EAA A 24 AANEEN ES 26 BEE SEU e E E A A E A 28 Inserta Memory Gard oenen enna a a Ee 31 Format the Memory Card csccsssccsssecssssccsscccssscssccessccessecessscessecessceesees 34 Adjust Viewfinder FOCUS ae asde eraa aE 36 Basic Photography and Playback sssoccssoscsscscoscseoscsccscsee 37 a NEEE NEON E A terete certs 37 Adjust Camera SettingS ssesccssessccsessscssesesssssecsseeeesneecrsseeecsneessnees 40 Ready the Camera ee neeaaea Ae e EAA SEARES EF Focus and Shoot ssssssssss Viewing Photographs Deleting Unwanted Photographs sssssssssssseesssssseesssseseessseseeesssseeeess 46 Camera Menus Most shooting playback and setup options MENU button can be accessed from the camera menus To view the menus press the MENU button Nikon Tabs Choose from the following menus D1 Playback A 244 T Setup 2 300 Shooting A 253 Ki Retouch 315 Custom Settings 1 260 T E My Menu or Recent settings defaults to My Menu 333 SETUP MENU Sl
8. 230 Print Select Print set DPOF Printing Programmed auto Protecting photographs Q Quality Movie settings ssssee 62 R Rank items My Menu sssssesecceeees 336 RAW primary JPEG secondary Secondary slot function Rear lens cap Rear curtain sync Recent settings Rechargeable Li ion battery Red eye correction Red eye reduction Release button to use dial Release mode Release mode dial Release mode dial lock release Remote cord Remove items My Menu sss 335 Removing the lens from the camera Reset custom settings Reset shooting menu 5 Reie naiona Restoring default SEtt NgS ossssssssssssssssse Retouch menu RGB Histogram Rotate tall scscssssssssesassescsscsssoesosncssecensass Save load settings Saving camera settings Screen tip Sieniniai SD card slot SD card slot Time stamp Primary slot selection 72 Time zone SD memory Card sseeeccssenees Secondary slot function Self timer Sensitivity S Sepia Monochrome sssssssssssssssssss Set Picture Control Setup menu Shade White balance ose Shooting data Shooting info display Shooting menu Shooting menu bank Shutter priority aUto s ssssssssessssssssesse Shutter release button 43 44 80 116 273 Shutter release button AE L Side by side comparison Single frame Single point AF Single servo AF sssssss
9. BE NEF RAW Recording gt Type Choose the type of compression for NEF RAW images Option Description boeeiass NEF images are compressed using a reversible ONE algorithm reducing file size by about 20 40 compressed with no effect on image quality gt NEF images are compressed using a non ON Compressed reversible algorithm reducing file size by about 40 55 with almost no effect on image quality Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed BE NEF RAW Recording gt NEF RAW Bit Depth Choose a bit depth for NEF RAW images Option Description 12 bit 12 bit NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits 14bit 14 bit producing files roughly 1 3 times larger than 12 bit files but increasing the color data recorded Maximum frame advance rate 1 89 falls to 2 5 fps Image Size Image size is measured in pixels Choose from the following options Option Size pixels Size when printed at 300 dpi approx L 4 288 x 2 848 36 3 x 24 1 cm 14 3 x 9 5 in M 3 216 x 2 136 27 2 x 18 1 cm 10 7 x 7 1 in S 2 144 x 1 424 18 2 x 12 1 cm 7 1 x 4 7 in Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch dpi 1 inch approximately 2 54 cm Image size can be set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the sub command dial until the
10. Icon Control panel Viewfinder Description Battery fully charged Battery partially discharged Low battery Prepare to charge battery S cA or ready spare battery cA Shutter release disabled Charge or blinks blinks exchange battery No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional AC adapter 37 38 3 Check the number of exposures remaining The exposure count displays in the control panel and viewfinder show the number of photographs that can be taken at current settings if two memory cards are inserted the displays show the space available on the card in the primary slot 72 When this number reaches zero will flash in the exposure count displays while the shutter speed displays will show a blinking F wit or Fut and the icon for the affected card will blink Large Capacity Memory Cards When enough memory remains on the mem r55 ory card to record a thousand or more pictures e at current settings the number of exposures zi ik ah t2 remaining will be shown in thousands Ja t rounded down to the nearest hundred e g if ZEIA E there is room for approximately 1 260 expo sures the exposure count display will show 1 2 K LCD IIluminators Rotating the power switch toward 8 Power switch activates the exposure meters and the control panel backlight LCD illuminator allowing the display to be read in th
11. 19 u JeF Ps I i 28 20 ea SG uo 27 21 apma A A z l Z l 24 22 23 g Flash compensation indicator 177 Number of exposures remaining 38 Exposure compensation Number of shots remaining before indicato iesin 118 memory buffer fills BEY FV lock indicator eerrnnnneerne 179 Capture mode indicator CompactFlash CF card Preset white balance indicator 32 recording indicator Secure Digital SD card Manual lens number 197 Tae lt Xe eee eee 32 ZZA ISO sensitivity indicator 96 zr Clock not set indicator 30 378 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator 99 ie Exposure and flash Multiple EXPOSE indicato sens 186 bracketing indicator 23 Beep indicator sesssssssssssseeesesseee 275 WB bracketing indicator EZ MB D10 battery indicator 280 ADL bracketing indicator 25 Battery indicator 37 29 GPS connection indicator EJ Interval timer indicator 10 The Viewfinder Display 1 2 ooo COO oc 3 __8 _ oo0o0o0o 000 o000O ouuo OVUUU oon Ol 10 1112 13 14 Framing grid displayed Number of exposures when On is selected for Custom FEMAINING sesecccssseecccesssescceesseeeeeseee 38 Setting d2 oeeeeeesesccccsseesseceneeeceeeeee 275 Number of shots remaining before J Focus points wes 78 267 memory buffer fills 43 89 JE AF area brackets n n
12. A Note on Electronically Controlled Cameras In extremely rare instances unusual characters may appear in the control panel and the camera may stop functioning In most cases this phenomenon is caused by a strong external static charge Turn the camera off remove and replace the battery and turn the camera on again or if you are using an AC adapter available separately disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again In the event of continued malfunction contact your retailer or Nikon authorized service representative Note that disconnecting the power source as described above may result in loss of any data not recorded to the memory card at the time the problem occurred Data already recorded to the card will not be affected BE Shooting Camera takes time to turn on Delete files or folders Shutter release disabled Memory card is full or not inserted 1 31 38 Memory card is locked SD cards only M 35 e CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest f number If FE E is displayed in control panel select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f8 Customize command dials gt Aperture setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture M 297 e Exposure mode S selected with u amp selected for shutter speed QO 380 Camera is slow to respond to shutter release button Select Off for Custom Setting d10 Exposure delay mode M 278 Photos are out of focus
13. Option Role assigned to center of multi selector RESET Select center focus point Select center focus point SEJE Highlight active focus point Highlight active focus point Not used None HE Playback Mode Option Role assigned to center of multi selector E Thumbnail on off Toggle between full frame and thumbnail playback Lal View histograms In both full frame and thumbnail playback a histogram is displayed while the center of the multi selector is pressed Q Zoom on off Toggle between full frame or thumbnail playback and playback zoom Choose the initial zoom setting from Low magnification Medium magnification and High magnification The zoom display will center on the active focus point 291 Option Role assigned to center of multi selector 292 Display card slot selection dialog highlight slot and press to display list of folders Highlight folder and press to select folder for playback Only folders currently selected for playback 0 245 are displayed f3 Multi Selector MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If Reset meter off delay is selected E 13 Multi selector operating the multi selector when the z exposure meters are off M 39 will activate EE the exposure meters If Do nothing is AT donthng OR selected the exposure meters will not be activated when the multi selector is pressed Choose slot and folder 2 f4 Photo
14. Rotate focus mode selector to or 74 Camera unable to focus using autofocus use manual focus or focus lock 80 83 e Tripod selected in live view camera will not focus when shutter release button is pressed halfway Use AF ON button 50 Full range of shutter speeds not available Flash in use Flash sync speed can be selected using Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed when using optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash unit choose 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP for full range of shutter speeds 21 281 Focus does not lock when shutter release button is pressed halfway Camera is in focus mode C use AE L AF L button to lock focus M 81 Can not select focus point e Unlock focus selector lock 1 78 Auto area AF selected for focus mode choose another mode 76 Camera is in playback mode M 203 e Menus are in use M 243 Press shutter release button halfway to turn monitor off or activate exposure meters M 39 Image size can not be changed Image quality set to NEF RAW 2 68 Camera is slow to record photos Turn long exposure noise reduction off 258 Beep does not sound e Off is selected for Custom Setting d1 Beep M 275 Camera is in quiet shutter release mode 86 Camera is in focus mode C or M M 74 e Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection M 264 e Movie is being recorded 1 58 Photos not recorded in live
15. Format the Memory Card Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being used or formatted in other devices m Formatting Memory Cards Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding M 224 1 Turn the camera on 2 Press the a buttons button MODE button Hold the MODE and buttons down simultaneously until a blinking F a r appears in the shutter speed displays in the control panel and viewfinder If two memory cards are inserted the primary card slot A 72 will be selected you can choose the secondary slot by rotating the main command dial To exit without formatting the memory card wait until F a r stops blinking about six seconds or press any button other than the MODE and tt buttons 3 Press the buttons again Press the MODE and tt buttons together a second time while F a r is blinking to format the memory card Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting When formatting is complete the control panel and viewfinder will show the number of photographs that can be recorded at current settings vV Memory Cards Memory cards may be hot after use Observe due caution when removing memory cards from the camera Turn the power off before i
16. Increase amount of green Increase KEA Increase amount of Or amount of blue G s amber Increase amount of magenta Zoom To zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor press the button The histogram will be updated to show data only for the portion of the image displayed in the monitor While the image is zoomed in press the O n button to toggle back and forth between color balance and zoom When zoom is selected you can zoom in and out with the amp and buttons and scroll the image with the multi selector 323 Image Overlay MENU button gt g retouch menu Image overlay combines two existing NEF RAW photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals the results which make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor are noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings before creating an overlay set image quality and size 68 71 all options are available To create a NEF RAW copy choose an image quality of NEF RAW 1 Select Image overlay E mase overlay Image 1 Image2 Preview Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu and press P The dialog shown at right will lt be displayed with Image 1 OR Select highlighted 2 Display NEF RAW images Image overlay Image 1 Press A picture selection l dialog will be displayed Zoom
17. 213 214 EE Shooting Data Page 4 NIKON TARO COPYRIGHT NIKON F Protect status 2 Retouch indicator FE Name of photographer oe Copyright Holder sesssssssssssesesssseesusssee 5 Camera name 6 Folder number frame number 256 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode 2 247 and copyright information was appended to photograph 309 EE GPS Data NL 1 35 36 371 1139 43 696 35m 15 04 2009 10 15 29 1 Protect status 219 B Retouch indicator ecsssossssssssssssssesseesees 315 FE Latitude E Longitude 5 Altitude i Coordinated Universal Time UTC Heading 2 Camera name 9 Folder number frame number 256 1 Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken 1 198 2 Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass HE Overview Data Histogram showing the distribution of tones in the image 1A 211 Horizontal axis corresponds to pixel brightness vertical axis shows number of pixels of each brightness in image FEJ GPs data indicator EE mage comment indicator 303 EJ Flash mode 1 Frame number total number of frames 11 Flash compensation 2 Protect status cccccccssssssssssssssssssesscsssseee 219 12 Exposure COMPENSATION eeseeecesrseeee 118 JEJ camera name E Metering method PJ Retouch indicator smmmmmnnnnne 315 E Exposure mode iG Shutter spee
18. Diopter Adjustment Viewfinder Lens DK 20C To accommodate individual differences in vision viewfinder lenses are available with diopters of 5 4 3 2 0 0 5 1 2 and 3 m Use diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control 2 to 1 m Test diopter adjustment lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be achieved The rubber eyecup can not be used with diopter adjustment lenses Magnifying Eyepiece DK 21M The DK 21M magnifies the view through the viewfinder by approximately 1 17 x 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m for greater precision when framing Magnifier DG 2 The DG 2 magnifies the scene displayed in the viewfinder Use for close up photography copying telephoto lenses and other tasks that call for added precision DK 22 eyepiece adapter available separately required Eyepiece Adapter DK 22 The DK 22 is used when attaching the DG 2 magnifier to the D300S Right Angle Viewing Attachment DR 6 The DR 6 attaches to the viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera is in the horizontal shooting position Filters e Nikon filters can be divided into three types screw on slip in and rear interchange Use Nikon filters filters manufactured by other makers may interfere with autofocus or electronic range finding The D300S can not be used
19. El Long exp NR 2 Selecta color space Highlight the desired option and press n Adobe Adobe RGB 2 166 Color Space Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that represent them in a digital image file The sRGB color space is widely used while the Adobe RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing sRGB is recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or viewed in applications that do not support color management or when taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint the direct printing option on some household printers or kiosk printing or other commercial print services Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed using these options but colors will not be as vivid JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 compliant applications and printers that support Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 will select the correct color space automatically If the application or device does not support Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 select the appropriate color space manually An ICC color profile is embedded in TIFF photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space allowing applications that support color management to automatically select the correct color space For more information see the documentation provided with the application or device Nikon Software ViewNxX supplied and Capture NX 2
20. In My Menu 1 highlight Rank items and press gt Select an item Highlight the item you wish to move and press iy Rank items Image quality NORM JPEG compression iy Y NEF RAW recording y w Select items 336 Position the item Press Aor V to move the item up or down in My Menu and press Repeat Steps 2 3 to reposition additional items ALG Image quality JPEG compression NEF RAW recording P t5Assign Fn button Displaying Recent Settings To display the twenty most recently used settings select Recent settings for i My Menu gt Choose tab 1 Select Choose tab MY MENU Image quality In My Menu highlight er Choose tab and press P te Remove items Rank items 2 Select Recent settings Highlight amp Recent settings and press amp The name of the menu will change from MY MENU to RECENT SETTINGS Y uw A G Recent settings Gy Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu as they are used To view My Menu again select 4 My Menu for Recent settings gt Choose tab Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu To remove an item from the recent settings menu highlight it and press the t button A confirmation dialog will be displayed press f again to delete the selected item 337 338 Technical Notes Camera Care Options and Resources Read
21. available separately is connected 1 241 NEF RAW photos not displayed in Capture NX Update to Capture NX 2 M 355 Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the low pass filter Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is performed M 305 Computer displays NEF RAW images differently from camera Third party software does not display effects of Picture Controls or active D Lighting Use ViewNxX supplied or optional Nikon software such as Capture NX 2 available separately Can not copy pictures to computer using Nikon Transfer Operating system is not supported M 224 Transfer pictures from the memory card using a card reader or card slot HE Miscellaneous Date of recording is not correct Set camera clock M 29 Menu item can not be selected Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted Note that Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an optional AC adapter 1 307 Error Messages This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder control panel and monitor
22. Cleaning off Automatic image sensor cleaning off m Image Sensor Cleaning Using camera controls interrupts image sensor cleaning Image sensor cleaning may not be performed at startup if the flash is on Cleaning is performed by vibrating the low pass filter If dust can not be fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu clean the image sensor manually N 361 or consult a Nikon authorized service representative If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera s internal circuitry Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait EE Manual Cleaning If foreign matter can not be removed from the low pass filter using the Clean image sensor M 358 option in the setup menu the filter can be cleaned manually as described below Note however that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon authorized service personnel 1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low pass filter If the battery level is below 60 turn the camera off and insert a fully charged EN EL3e battery or connect an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter 2 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning PEIEE Remove the lens and turn the camera on Highlight Lock mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu an
23. E P ids 5 During live view the camera displays the shutter speed and aperture in effect at the start of live view Exposure is metered again when the shutter release button is pressed all the way down Metering can not be changed during live view Choose a metering method before starting live view To reduce blur in tripod mode choose On for Custom Setting d10 Exposure delay mode M 278 Exposure Compensation In P S and A modes exposure compensation can be adjusted by 5 EV in increments of 1 3 EV 118 The Information Display To hide or display indicators in the monitor in live view mode press the button Information on Information off s tai0iou Wo 2001 iD P25 156 2001 10k Virtual horizon Framing guides not displayed during zoom not displayed during zoom AF area brackets AF area brackets are displayed only in hand held mode inf ir gaal iik Hand held Tripod 55 56 Monitor Brightness Monitor brightness can be adjusted by pressing the gt and gt button The brightness indicator at the right of the display will turn yellow keeping the gt button pressed press A or to adjust brightness note that monitor P brightness has no effect on pictures taken in live view mode To return to live view release the P button HDMI When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device the camera monitor will turn off and the video device will display t
24. This section describes the options available to control exposure including metering exposure mode exposure lock exposure compensation and bracketing Me teri tn Gierccrcictccccsccccessceccccsestscecceectcceccecestccssscrsensecosccactcestscres Exposure MOCO ceitecscsscsscccacsecosscrecsscocecccvscenssesstorscessseconsctesses PlProgramimed AUTO nanea AA es 5 Shutter Priority Auto A Aperture Priority Auto AMan aE enter cccen sean e uve PONG MIME EXPOSUNCS cerccecccescsccececcececcececsceecsecescsecesuceceeeeenees Autoexposure AE LOCK ccscscsssscesscessscessecscserscserecserers 116 Exposure COMPeNSatiON sc sscsccsssesssssececcsssecsecsassacerces 118 Bracketing ticccccscsscsccctcscscesccestetesscssescasecsetassevcucevacessesseciararseess 120 101 Metering Metering determines how the camera sets exposure The following options are available Method Description ro Recommended in most situations Camera meters a wide 3D color 2 of the frame and sets exposure according to distribution of brightness color distance and composition for natural matrix Il results Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to 8 mm 5 circle in center of viewfinder if CPU z lens is attached area can be selected J aa using Custom Setting b5 Center weighte weighted area 1 272 Classic meter E iaht d for portraits enter welgnts
25. a Primary slot selection Secondary slot function v Image quality Image size OE 4 Position the new item Py Choose position Image quality Press A or W to move the new PEG compression item up or down in My Menu J Press to add the new item l 5 Add more items E Aid items O Shooting menu bank The items currently displayed in My D ene Menu are indicated by a check mark _ oS Items indicated by a N icon can not be Secondary slot function v Image quality selected Repeat steps 1 4 to select v image size additional items Deleting Options from My Menu 1 Select Remove items In My Menu B highlight Remove items and press gt 2 Select items Remove items Done Highlight items and press to ecg O JPEG i select or deselect Selected Bo srt items are indicated by a check CSGA i babi mark 3 Select Done Highlight Done and press amp A E D imo anit i i i i O PEG i confirmation dialog will be displayed T O 5Assign Fn button 4 Delete the selected items Press to delete the selected T Delete selected item EWCancel Deleting Items in My Menu To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu press the button A confirmation dialog will be displayed press t again to remove the selected item from My Menu 335 Reordering Options in My Menu 1 Select Rank items
26. c Timers AE lock d Shooting display Bracketing flash f Controls bank 262 settings 262 Customsetting B Resetcustom Custom Setting groups a A y AES prierity selection em Dynamic AF area 9 Focus tracking with lockon AF2 E b Metering exposure v3 y LEN steps for exposure entri b3 Exp comp fine tune bA Easy exposure compensation OFF o c Tamers AE lock 5 OFF c2 Auto meter off delay 6 3 Selftimer cA Monitor off delay y 2Viewlinder srid dsplay 3 Viewtinder warning display ON el Screen tip Flash shutter speed Flash cntrl for built in flash TT Modeling flash y t2 Multi selector center buttea t3 Multi selector t4 Photo info playback The following Custom Settings are available Custom setting bank 262 d Shooting display A Reset custom settings 262 d5 CL mode shooting speed 276 a Autofocus d Max continuous release 276 al AF C priority selection 263 d7 File number sequence 277 a2 AF S priority selection 264 d8 Information display 278 a3 Dynamic AF area 264 d9 LCD illumination 278 a4 Focus tracking with lock on 266 d10 Exposure delay mode 278 a5 AF activation 266 dll MB D10 battery type 279 a6 AF point illumination 266 di2 Battery order 280 a7 Focus point wrap around 267 e Bracketing flash a8 AF point selection 267 el Flash sync speed 281 a9 Bui
27. point and press the shutter release button halfway to initiate focus 2 Check that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder 25 56 Single servo AF Focus will lock automatically when the in focus indicator D appears and remain locked D until you remove your finger N from the shutter release button Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE L AF L button see following page Shutter Release Button AE L If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 Shutter release button AE L Q 273 exposure will lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway Continuous servo AF Press the AE L AF L button to lock both Dy focus and exposure an AE L icon appears D in the viewfinder see page 116 Focus and exposure will remain locked while me the AE L AF L button is pressed even if you later remove your finger from the shutter release button Z Shutter release button AE L AF L button 3 Recompose the photograph and shoot Focus will remain locked between shots as long as the shutter release button is kept pressed halfway allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the same focus setting Focus will also remain locked between shots while the AE L AF L button is pressed Do not change the distance between the camera and the subje
28. 1 280 x 720 960 x 536 640 x 360 Possible sizes A Viewing Cropped Copies Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are displayed 321 322 Monochrome MENU button gt gh retouch menu Copy photographs in Black and white E Monochrome Sepia or Cyanotype blue and white monochrome Black and white gt Y Sepia E Cyanotype Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype Increase displays a preview of the selected saturation image press to increase color K 7N gt saturation W to decrease Press O 5 to create a monochrome copy 4 aq 2 Decrease saturation Filter Effects MENU button gt gh retouch menu Choose from the following color filter effects After adjusting filter effects as described below press to copy the photograph Option Description Creates the effect of a skylight filter making the picture less blue The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown at right Skylight Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects giving the Warm filter copy a warm red cast The effect can be previewed in the monitor Color Balance MENU button gt gi retouch menu Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color balance as shown below The effect is displayed in the monitor together with red green and blue histograms M 210 giving the distribution of tones in the copy Press to copy the photograph
29. 1 3 step b3 Exp comp fine tune M 270 1 3 step b4 Easy exposure compensation 1 271 Off b5 Center weighted area M 272 8 mm b6 Fine tune optimal exposure M 272 Matrix metering 0 Center weighted metering 0 Spot metering 0 Option Default c1 Shutter release button AE L M 273 Off c2 Auto meter off delay 11 273 6s c3 Self timer 1 273 10s c4 Monitor off delay 1 274 Playback 10s Menus 20s Information display 10s Image review 4s d1 Beep 1 275 High d2 Viewfinder grid display 1 275 Off d3 Viewfinder warning display 275 On d4 Screen tips N 276 On d5 CL mode shooting speed M 276 3 fps d6 Max continuous release M 276 100 d7 File number sequence 1 277 On d8 Information display M 278 Auto d9 LCD illumination 278 Off d10 Exposure delay mode M 278 Off d11 MB D10 battery type 1 279 LR6 AA alkaline d12 Battery order M 280 Use MB D10 batteries first e1 Flash sync speed 281 1 250 s e2 Flash shutter speed 1 282 1 60 s e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash 1 283 TTL e4 Modeling flash 2 289 On e5 Auto bracketing set M 289 AE amp flash e6 Auto bracketing Mode M 1 290 Flash speed e7 Bracketing order 290 MTR gt under gt over f1 amp switch 9 291 LCD backlight 8 f2 Multi selector center button 1 291 Shooting mode Select
30. 7 Aperture f number 109 111 Aperture number of stops 110 Bracketing increment 122 126 Number of shots in ADL bracketing sequence Maximum aperture non CPU lenses 8 Flash MOC ssssssssssssssssssssssssesssseseess K ISO sensitivity indicator Auto ISO sensitivity indicator White balanCe ss ssssssssssesesssssssrsssrese White balance fine tuning MAICITOY siisii TERTE E EHF SRGB CUSTOM WRCANAL AES lt 6 TEE AAR R AA aiaa tale Te B TEBAN BKT l 13 15 14 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 EXPOSUTES nnsssnssssssssssssssersrssseneresssneresnes 38 Number of exposures remaining Manual lens number 13 Fn button assignment J AE V AF L button assignment 15 Picture Control indicator Long exposure noise reduction i indicator Custom settings bank Auto area AF indicator Focus points indicator AF area mode indicator 3D tracking indicator Image quality eeessssesccsseccceeeeceenee H Primary secondary slot EJ Image size Exposure indicator cesssescssseecceees Exposure compensation indicator Bracketing progress indicator Exposure and flash bracketing 121 WB bracketing ADL bracketing 13 14 The Information Display Continued 2223 24 25 a aal gerea L masea il Al i 28 405 BGs MLN ff ieee 2 0 Tei eal ee
31. AF detection In single servo AF active focus points are highlighted for about one second after camera focuses Active focus points are not displayed in continuous servo AF AF Area Mode AF area mode is shown in the control panel ia AF area mode indicator AF area mode Control panel _ Single point AF Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF area 9 points i Dynamic 21 points area AF 51 points 51 points 3D tracking Auto area AF Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation Manual Focus Single point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used See Also For information on the settings available in dynamic area AF see Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF area 264 For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before refocusing when an object moves in front of the camera see Custom Setting a4 Focus tracking with lock on M 266 77 78 Focus Point Selection The D300S offers a choice of 51 focus points that together cover a wide area of the frame The focus point can be selected manually allowing photographs to be composed with the main subject positioned almost anywhere in the frame single point and dynamic area AF or automatically auto area AF note that manual focus point detection is not available when auto area AF is selected
32. Adjust focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus 10 With maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster The AF S AF I Teleconverter The AF S AF teleconverter can be used with the following AF S and AF I lenses e AF S VR Micro 105mm f 2 8G ED AF S VR 200mm f 2G ED AF S VR 300mm f 2 8G ED AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED II AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED AF 1 300mm f 2 8D ED AF S 300mm f 4D ED AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED II AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED AF I 400mm f 2 8D ED AF S 500mm f 4D ED II AF S 500mm f 4D ED 1 Autofocus not supported AF I 500mm f 4D ED AF S 600mm f 4D ED II AF S 600mm f 4D ED AF I 600mm f 4D ED AF S NIKKOR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED VRII AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D ED AF S VR 200 400mm f 4G ED AF S NIKKOR 400mm f 2 8G ED VR AF S NIKKOR 500mm f 4G ED VR AF S NIKKOR 600mm f 4G ED VR 2 Autofocus not supported when used with AF S Teleconverter TC 17E Il TC 20E Il Lens f number The f number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens Non CPU Lenses Non CPU lenses include manual focus lenses and other lenses without a built in CPU The following is a list of compatible non CPU lenses and accessories gamera setting Focus mode Exposure Metering system mode gt a M Paga i a c S M 3D Color CJ Lens accessory rangefinder Al Al modified NIKKOR or v vl lvil l vsv Nikon Series E lenses
33. CLS flash SB 900 SB 800 or SU 800 as commander and SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 as remotes Auto FP High Speed Sync and modeling illumination supported with all CLS compatible flash units except SB 400 Flash Color Information Communication and FV lock supported with all CLS compatible flash units Sync terminal ISO 519 sync terminal with locking thread White balance White balance Auto incandescent fluorescent 7 types direct sunlight flash cloudy shade preset manual up to 5 values can be stored choose color temperature 2500 K 10000 K all with fine tuning Live view Modes Tripod hand held Autofocus Tripod Contrast detect AF anywhere in frame Hand held Phase detection TTL AF with 51 focus points including 15 cross type sensors Movie Frame size pixels e 1 280 x 720 24 fps e 640 x 424 24 fps 320 x 216 24 fps File format AVI Compression Motion JPEG Audio Microphone sensitivity can be adjusted Monitor Monitor 3 in 921k dot VGA low temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with 170 viewing angle 100 frame coverage and brightness adjustment Playback Playback Full frame and thumbnail 4 9 or 72 images playback with playback zoom movie playback slide show highlights histogram display auto image rotation and image comment up to 36 characters Interface USB Hi Speed USB Video output Can be se
34. In autofocus mode focus will automatically be set to infinity in manual focus mode set focus to infinity manually 3 Acquire dust off reference data Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data The monitor turns off when the shutter release button is pressed If the reference object is too bright or too dark the camera may be unable to on TV Exposure settings are not acquire Image Dust Off reference data appropriate Change exposure settings and the message shown at right will be and try asain displayed Choose another reference object and repeat the process from step 1 m Image Dust Off Reference Data The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures Reference images can not be viewed using computer imaging software A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera Battery Info MENU button gt Setup menu View information on the battery currently Pen inserted in the camera 1 Bat meter y Pic meter d Battery age 0 4 Item Description Bat meter The current battery level expressed as a percentage Pic meter The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery since the battery was last charged Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording a photograph for exa
35. L 1 5 MB 2100 100 JPEG basic 4 M 0 9 MB 3600 100 S 0 4 MB 7800 100 Ww All figures are approximate File size varies with scene recorded Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 200 Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression ISO sensitivity is set toH 5 3 or higher High ISO NR is on when auto ISO sensitivity control is on or ISO sensitivity is set to 800 or higher or long exposure noise reduction active D lighting or image authentication is on Maximum frame rate when recording 14 bit NEF RAW images is 2 5 fps Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority Selecting Optimal quality increases the file size of JPEG images number of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly d6 Max Continuous Release M 276 The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 100 3 95 Battery Life The number of shots that can be taken with fully charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery temperature and how the camera is used In the case of AA batteries capacity also varies with make and storage conditions some batteries can not be used Sample figures for the camera and optional MB D10 multi power battery pack are given below CIPA standard One EN EL3e battery camera Approximately 950 shots One EN EL3e battery MB D10 Approximately 950 shots One EN EL4a battery
36. MB D10 Approximately 2000 shots Two EN EL3e batteries MB D10 Approximately 1900 shots One EN EL3e and one EN EL4a battery MB D10 Approximately 2950 shots Eight AA batteries MB D10 Approximately 1200 shots Nikon standard 2 One EN EL3e battery camera Approximately 3000 shots One EN EL3e battery MB D10 Approximately 3000 shots One EN EL4a battery MB D10 Approximately 5900 shots Two EN EL3e batteries MB D10 Approximately 6000 shots One EN EL3e and one EN EL4a battery MB D10 Approximately 8900 shots Eight AA batteries MB D10 Approximately 3400 shots 1 Measured at 23 C 73 4 F 2 C 3 6 F with an AF S VR 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G ED lens under the following test conditions lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s flash fired once every other shot Live view not used 2 Measured at 20 C 68 F with an AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED lens under the following test conditions image quality set to JPEG basic image size set to M medium shutter speed 250 s shutter release button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned off cycle repeated once exposure meters have turned off The following can reduce battery life e Using the monitor e Keeping the shutter release button pressed halfway Repeated au
37. Main command dial 2 Choose single frame release mode Hold the release mode dial lock release down and turn the release mode dial to S single frame At this setting the camera will take one photograph each time the shutter release button is pressed Release mode dial lock release Release mode dial 3 Choose single point AF Rotate the AF area mode selector until it clicks into place pointing to single point AF At this setting the user can choose the focus point AF area mode selector 4 Choose single servo Focus mode autofocus selector Rotate the focus mode selector until it clicks into place IP pointing to S single servo 7 autofocus At this setting the camera will automatically focus on the subject in the selected focus point when the shutter release button is pressed halfway Pictures can only be taken when the camera is in focus 5 Choose matrix metering Metering selector Rotate the metering selector to matrix metering Matrix metering uses information from the 1 005 pixel RGB sensor to ensure optimal results for the entire frame 6 Check camera settings P es A ca z Control panel Viewfinder display 41 42 Ready the Camera When framing photographs in the viewfinder hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the
38. N 283 179 180 Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units FV lock is also available with SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units available separately Set the optional flash to TTL mode the SB 900 and SB 800 can also be used in AA mode see the flash manual for details While FV lock is in effect flash output will automatically be adjusted for changes in flash zoom head position When Commander mode is selected for Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash M 283 FV lock can be used with remote SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units if a any of the built in flash flash group A or flash group B is in TTL mode or b a flash group is composed entirely of SB 900 and SB 800 flash units in TTL or AA mode Metering The metering areas for FV lock when using optional flash unit are as follows Flash unit Flash mode Metered area i i TTL 4 mm circle in center of frame Stand alone flash unit AA Area metered by flash exposure meter Used with other flash i TTL Entire frame units Advanced AA Wireless Lighting A master flash Area metered by flash exposure meter See Also For information on using the depth of field preview or AE L AF L button for FV lock see Custom Setting f6 Assign preview button 296 or Custom Setting f7 Assign AE L AF L button 2 296 Other Shooting Options This chapter covers restoring default settings making multiple exp
39. The Camera Clock The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary Insert a Memory Card The camera has two memory card slots one for Type CompactFlash memory cards Type Il cards and microdrives can not be used and another for Secure Digital SD memory cards memory cards are available separately 0 393 The following section describes how to insert and format a memory card 1 Turn the camera off Power switch vV Inserting and Removing Memory Cards Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory cards 2 Open the card slot cover Slide the card slot cover out and open the card slot 3 Insert the memory card CompactFlash card slot CompactFlash memory cards Insert the card into the CompactFlash card slot with the front label toward the monitor When the memory card is fully inserted the eject button will pop up and the green access lamp will light briefly Eject button Access lamp 31 32 SD memory cards Holding the card as shown slide it into the SD card slot until A it clicks into place The green access lamp will light briefly a SD card slot Access lamp m Inserting Memory Cards Inserting memory cards upside down or backwards could damage the camera or
40. a Resize If two memory cards are Select image inserted you can choose a E P Choose destination DSD 25m destination for the resized copy by highlighting Choose W Choose size destination and pressing gt if only one card is inserted proceed to Step 2 The menu shown at right will E Resize be displayed highlight a card slot and press Choose destination _ m COC CF card slot HIMES SD card slot 2 Chooseasize Highlight Choose size and LOIG press gt ss Cas aati g L2 The following options will be i Resize displayed highlight an option paata and press Y 11M Option Size pixels Option Size pixels rh 2 5M 1920 x 1280 0 6M 960 x 640 1 1M 1280x856 0 3M 640 x 424 329 330 3 Choose pictures Highlight Select image and Y press gt N Bee WH Choose size The dialog shown at right will i Resize be displayed highlight Beene pictures using the multi selector and press the center of the multi selector to select or deselect to view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the amp button to view images in other locations press amp and select the desired card and folder as described on page 217 Selected pictures are marked by a Pm icon Press when the selection is complete 4 save the resized copies A confirmation dialog will be displayed Highlight Yes and press to save the resized co
41. blue 209 EE RGB Histogram JJ Mage highlights ssssssssssssssv tss1 2 209 2 Folder number frame number 256 E Protect Status cccccssssssssssssssssssssssseeesees 219 4 Retouch indicator essseossssssssssssssesseesens 315 White balance Color temperature White balance fine tuning Preset MANUAL ssssssssssssssssssressssssssssre 6 Current channel 2 IA Histogram RGB channel 3 In all histograms horizontal axis gives pixel brightness vertical axis number of pixels 8 Histogram red channel 3 H Histogram green channel 3 10 Histogram blue channel 3 E OSelect R G B 1 Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode 1 247 2 Blinking areas indicate highlights areas that may be overexposed for current channel Press lt or gt E button while pressing 4 button to cycle through channels ea as follows SS RGB R G B all channels red green blue Highlight display off 210 3 Some sample histograms are shown below Ifthe image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses the distribution of tones will be relatively even TU Ifthe image is bright tone distribution will be shifted to the right 7 sp gt a Ifthe image is dark tone distribution will be shifted to the left Increasing exposure compensation shifts the dist
42. e Print select Select pictures for printing e Print DPOF Print an existing print order created with the Print set DPOF option in the playback menu M 237 The current print order will be displayed in Step 3 To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card select Index print See page 236 for more information 233 234 3 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card To display the current picture full screen press and hold the amp button OT button To select the current picture for a Print select printing press the O n button aaa and press A The picture will a i Kem RA be marked with a amp icon and m the number of prints will be set 7 Esm to 1 Keeping the O n button pressed press A or W to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press W when the number of prints is 1 Continue until all the desired pictures have been selected Display printing options Setup Press to display PictBridge as printing options Border Time stamp 5 Adjust printing options ET Press A or W to highlight an Start printing Page size option and press to select Border Time stamp Option Description Page size Menu of page size options will be displayed 1 230 Press A or W to choose page size to print at default page size for current printer select Prin
43. iy Shooting menu bank Highlight the desired bank and press gt 2 Entera name Keyboard area Shooting menu ba To move the cursor in the name ro area press the 9E button and MER press lt or gt To enter a new letter at the current cursor position use the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press the center of the multi selector To delete the character at the current cursor position press the button To return to the shooting menu without changing the bank name press the MENU button Bank names can be up to twenty characters long Any characters after the twentieth will be deleted 3 Save changes and exit E Shooting menu bank O Rename After editing the name press A to save changes and exit The ws Shooting menu bank menu m will be displayed n 255 Reset Shooting Menu MENU button gt shooting menu Select Yes to restore default settings forthe III current shooting menu bank See page 368 for a list of default settings Active Folder MENU button gt O shooting menu Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored HE New Folder Number 1 Select New folder number GB Active folder New folder number Highlight New folder number and press gt The dialog shown lt jon at right will be displayed lt 2 Choose a folder number Press lt or gt to highlight a digit press A or W to change
44. press the button Press when settings are complete 5 Select a destination Choose a destination for the 02 Unused R A m3 custom Picture Control C 1 a 05 Unused through C 9 and press gt aa g ECT Unused 6 Name the Picture Control The text entry dialog shown at right will be displayed By default new Picture Controls are named by adding a two digit number assigned automatically to the name of the existing Picture Control A This name can be edited to create a new name of up to 19 characters as described on page 255 The new Picture Control will appear in Set a Enst the Picture Control list FSNL Neutral Y EIVI Vivid ENC Monochrome EIV IV ID 02 161 162 Manage Picture Control gt Rename Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time using the Rename option in the Manage Picture Control menu Save edit Manage Picture Control gt Delete a aei oad save The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control menu can be used to delete selected custom Picture Controls when they are no longer needed The Original Picture Control Icon The original preset Picture Control on which the Original Picture custom Picture Control is based is indicated by Control icon an icon in the top right corner of the edit vivio o HED display Contrast Brightness Saturation Hue GHGrid Sharing Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls created using the
45. previous following picture will be displayed If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded f following picture will be displayed as described for Show Continue Eii ae betore next If user was scrolling through pictures in reverse order previous picture will be displayed as described for Show previous Rotate Tall MENU button gt playback menu Choose whether to rotate tall portrait orientation pictures for display during playback Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review Option Description On Tall portrait orientation pictures are automatically rotated for display in the camera monitor Pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation M 304 will be displayed in wide landscape orientation Off Tall portrait orientation pictures are displayed in wide landscape orientation Slide Show MENU button gt gt playback menu Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder Q 245 Hidden images M 245 are not displayed Option Description Start Start slide show Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed To start the slide show highlight Start and press The following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress
46. 0 DPOF Digital Print Order Format Exif 2 21 Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras PictBridge Viewfinder Viewfinder Eye level pentaprism single lens reflex viewfinder Frame coverage Approx 100 horizontal and 100 vertical Magnification Approx 0 94 x 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m Eyepoint 19 5 mm 1 0 m7 Diopter adjustment 2 1 m7 Focusing screen Ships with type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark II screen with AF area brackets framing grid can be displayed Reflex mirror Quick return Depth of field preview When depth of field preview button is pressed lens aperture is stopped down to value selected by user A and M modes or by camera P and S modes Lens aperture Instant return electronically controlled Lens Compatible lenses DX AF NIKKOR All functions supported Type G or D AF NIKKOR All functions supported PC Micro NIKKOR does not support some functions IX NIKKOR lenses not supported Other AF NIKKOR All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II Lenses for F3AF not supported Al P NIKKOR All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II Non CPU Can be used in exposure modes A and M color matrix metering and aperture value display supported if user provides lens data Al lenses only Electronic rangefinder can be used if maximum aperture is f 5 6 or faster Shutter Type Electronically co
47. 1 4 D amp x BUND YY 4 amp OA FD DN DY fA 1 4 f 2 2 8 f 4 115 6 1 8 t11 t 16 f 22 1 32 1 4 4 16 Aperture bbo BID 2 B j 30 15 8 4 2 1 2 4 8 15 30 60 125 250 5001000 2000 4000 8000 Shutter speed The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent When matrix metering is used values over 17 1 3 EV are reduced to 171 3 EV Troubleshooting If the camera fails to function as expected check the list of common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative HE Display Viewfinder is out of focus Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional diopter adjustment lenses 0 36 353 Viewfinder is dark Insert a fully charged battery M 22 37 Displays turn off without warning Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay or c4 Monitor off delay 273 274 Unusual characters displayed in control panel See A Note on Electronically Controlled Cameras below Displays in control panel or viewfinder are unresponsive and dim The response times and brightness of these displays varies with temperature Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is highlighted These phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and do not indicate a malfunction
48. 2 GBt 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB Panasonic 512 MB 1 GB 2 GBt 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 512 MB 1 GB 2 GBt 4 GB 8 GB Platinum II 512 MB 1 GB 2 GBt 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB Professional 1 GB 2 GB t 4 GB 8 GB All cards listed can be used regardless of speed t If card will be used with card reader or other device check that device supports 2GB cards SDHC compliant If card will be used with card reader or other device Sa check that device supports SDHC Lexar Media Other cards have not been tested For more details on the above cards please contact the manufacturer Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 4 GB SanDisk Extreme IV SDCFX4 card at different image quality and size settings Image quality Image size Filesize No of images Buffer capacity NEF RAW Lossless compressed 12 bit rere 137 18 NEF RAW Lossless compressed 14 bit 3 E 147MB 1a ne NEF RAW Compressed 12 bit T Wee 270 20 NEF RAW Compressed 13 0 MB 223 45 14 bit 3 NEF RAW Uncompressed 19 5 MB 197 17 12 bit NEF RAW Uncompressed 25 4 MB 151 19 14 bit 3 L 36 6 MB 105 16 TIFF RGB M 20 6 MB 187 19 S 9 3 MB 416 27 L 6 0 MB 552 44 JPEG fine 4 M 3 4 MB 976 100 S 1 5 MB 2100 100 L 3 0 MB 1000 100 JPEG normal 4 M 1 7 MB 1800 100 S 0 8 MB 4100 100
49. Al Exposure mode Programmed auto with flexible program FP shutter priority auto S aperture priority auto A manual M Exposure compensation 5 5 EV in increments of 1 3 1 2 or 1 EV Exposure bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 3 1 2 2 3 or 1 EV Exposure Flash bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 3 1 2 2 3 or 1 EV White balanc 2 9 frames in steps of 1 2 or 3 bracketing ADL bracketing 2 frames using selected value for one frame or 3 5 frames using preset values for all frames Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value with AE L AF L button ISO sensitivity Recommended Exposure Index ISO 200 3200 in steps of 1 3 1 2 or 1 EV Can also be set to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 or 1 EV ISO 100 equivalent below ISO 200 or to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 or 1 EV ISO 6400 equivalent above ISO 3200 auto ISO sensitivity control available Active D Lighting Can be selected from Auto Extra high High Normal Low or Off Focus Autofocus Nikon Multi CAM 3500DX autofocus sensor module with TTL phase detection fine tuning 51 focus points including 15 cross type sensors and AF assist illuminator range approx 0 5 3 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in Detection range 1 19 EV ISO 100 20 C 68 F Lens servo Autofocus AF Single servo AF S continuous servo AF C predictive focus tracking automatically activated according to subjec
50. Can I display a framing grid in the Viewfinder grid display 275 viewfinder Question Key phrase RE How do I set the clock How do I set the clock for daylight 2 29 savings time Time zone and date 302 How do change time zones when I KE travel How do l adjust monitor brightness for LCD brightness 301 menus or playback How do I change the self timer delay Self timer 273 How do turn the speaker off Beep 275 Can I reverse the exposure indicator Reverse indicators 299 Can I display the menus in a different lang as 28 language guag 303 Can I save menu settings for use on a different D300S camera pavellead settings 310 How do restore default settings Two button reset 182 How do restore shooting menu Reset shootingmenu 256 defaults How do restore Custom Setting Reset custom settings 262 defaults HE Menus and Displays Question Key phrase mo How do I get more information ona Help 21 menu How do I use the menus Using the menus 18 Can get quick access to frequently used My Menu 333 settings Can get quick access to recently used Recent settings 337 settings What do these indicators mean Viewfinder control 8 10 What information is in the information panel information 1 2 display display What does this warning mean error messages ang 378 displays How much charge does the battery have Battery level 37 left vi
51. EL4a EN EL4 and AA batteries are available separately Higher frame rates are available with EN EL4a EN EL4 and AA batteries M 89 note however that in the case of AA batteries the frame rate will decrease as battery level drops The information display shows the type of battery inserted in the MB D10 as follows FISD dy ABT MB D10 battery type display Battery type Esot EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery EEA EN EL4a or EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion battery AA batteries 280 e Bracketing Flash e1 Flash Sync Speed MENU button gt Custom Settings menu This option controls flash sync speed Option Description Use auto FP high speed sync with SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB R200 flash units If other flash units are used shutter 1 320s _ speed is set to 1 320 s When the camera shows a shutter Auto FP speed of 1 320 s in exposure mode F or A auto FP high speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1 320 s Use auto FP high speed sync with SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB R200 flash units If other flash units are used shutter 1 250s _ speed is set to 1 250 s When the camera shows a shutter Auto FP speed of 1 250 s in exposure mode F or A auto FP high speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1 250 s 1 250 s 1 60 s Flash sync speed set to selected value Fixing Shutter S
52. Fi cards on and off but may not support other Eye Fi functions Supported Eye Fi Cards As of April 2009 the following 2 GB Eye Fi cards can be used Eye Fi Home Eye Fi Share and Eye Fi Explore Eye Fi cards are for use only in the country of purchase Be sure the Eye Fi card firmware has been updated to the latest version Firmware Version MENU button gt Y Setup menu View the current camera firmware version K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies To display the retouch menu press MENU and select the amp retouch menu tab MENU button RETOUCH MENU a RETOUCH MENU gt Red eve correction Teim achro f T Y Monschrome a 2N Filter etfects Color balanc ae lt gt E Color balance Image overlay Image overlay E NEF RAM or E El NEF RAW processing The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of existing pictures The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card containing photographs is inserted in the camera Option aa E D Lighting 319 Red eye correction 320 M Trim 321 CH Monochrome 322 Filter effects 322 sof Color balance 323 Gah Image overlay 324 NEF RAW processing 327 Em Resize 329 JI Edit movie 64 mo Side by side comparison 331 Options that can not be applied to current image are grayed out and unavailable 1 Can only be selected by pressing MENU and
53. Ifa folder with the selected number already exists a D or icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number DO Folder is empty I Folder is partially full E Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 No further pictures can be stored in this folder 3 save changes and exit Press to complete the operation and return to the shooting menu to exit without changing the active folder press the MENU button If a folder with the specified number does not already exist a new folder will be created Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full 256 HE Select Folder 1 Choose Select folder Sa Active folder Select folder Highlight Select folder and 7 10203005 press T aws 2 Highlight a folder Press A or W to highlight a folder 3 Select the highlighted folder Press to select the highlighted folder and return to the shooting menu to exit without changing the active folder press the MENU button Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder M Folder and File Numbers If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 the shutter release will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken To continue shooting create a folder with a number less than 999 or select an existing folder with a number less than 999 and less than 999 images Number of Fold
54. In self timer mode 91 the number of copies specified in the white balance program will be created each time the shutter is released If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded BE ADL Bracketing The camera varies Active D Lighting over a series of exposures For more information on Active D Lighting see page 164 1 Select ADL bracketing Auto bracketing set Choose ADL bracketing for Custom MMM Setting e5 Auto bracketing set E Flashonly we WB bracketing fi ADL bracketing H 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the Fn button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the control panel Number of shots Fa Button Main command Control panel dial ADL bracketing indicator At settings other than zero an Aidt icon and ADL bracketing indicator will appear in the control panel Choose two shots to take one photograph with Active D Lighting off and another at a selected value Choose three to five shots to take a series of photographs with Active D Lighting set to Off Low and Normal three shots Off Low Normal and High four shots or Off Low Normal High and Extra High five shots If you choose more than two shots proceed to Step 4 129 3 Select Active D Lig
55. Lenses with Aperture Rings In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring 340 lock aperture at the minimum setting highest f number 27 Basic Setup The language option in the setup menu is automatically highlighted the first time menus are displayed Choose a language and set the time and date Note that if the time and date are not set will blink in the monitor and the time and date recorded with photographs will be incorrect 1 Turn the camera on Power switch r 2 Select Language Press MENU to display the camera menus then select Language in the setup menu For information on using menus see Using Camera Menus a 19 oa SETUP MENU Format memory card LCD brightness 0 sp Clean image sensor z Lock mirror up for cleaning Video mode 39 HDMI AUTO Time zone and date gt En 3 Selecta language i Lanavase 0k Dansk Press A or W to highlight the desired language and press g amp Ene Fi Suomi Fr Francais It Italiano NI Nederlands 28 4 Select Time zone and date SETUP MENU Format memory card LOD brightness Select Time zone and date B cis wigs cancer and press gt Y a HOMI RECEN 5 Set time zone i Time 20 M Time zone e D Select Time zone and press gt Seman Press lt or P to highlight the sateen local time zone the UTC field i shows the difference b
56. MENU button image sensor menu z SETUP MENU Format memory card m i 0 Press MENU to display the Ee menus Highlight Clean e Si yioma image sensor in the setup fee i menu and press P ee ia at 3 Select Clean now Highlight Clean now and press gt The message shown at right will be displayed while cleaning is in progress The message shown at right will be displayed when cleaning is complete HE Clean at Startup Shutdown ie Clean image sensor LA Clean now s CE E Clean at startup shutdown L2 ie Clean image sensor Cleaning image sensor 1 Select Clean at startup shutdown Display the Clean image sensor menu as described in Step 2 on the previous page Highlight Clean at startup shutdown and press P Clean image sensor Y Geannow wa Po Clean at startuo shutdown gt 2 Select an option Ba Clean imase s Clean at startup shutdown Highlight one of the following n options and press B GFF Clean at shutdown Gi Clean at startup amp shutdown E Option Description The image sensor is automatically cleaned 0N Clean at startu 0N P each time the camera is turned on The image sensor is automatically cleaned Clean at i i F during shutdown each time the camera is shutdown turned off N Clean at startup The image sensor is cleaned automatically at E amp shutdown startup and at shutdown
57. Photo Info Playback ssssssssssssesssseseecssssessecsssessscesseeeeees 292 5 ASSIGN FIN BUON decries 292 XV f6 Assign Preview Button csecsssssccsseccssseeccsseecsseeeessseecseee 296 7 Assign AE L AF L Button ssssesssccssseesseesssseceesnnseessees 296 f8 Customize Command Dials ccccsesssesseesesssessseeseesseess 297 f9 Release Button to Use Dial f10 No Memory Card 299 f11 Reverse Indicators 299 The Setup Menu Camera Setup 300 Format Memory Card 301 LCD Brightness 301 Video Mode 301 ADM lera taera eA Ea aE ENEA 302 Time Zone and Date sssssssesssssssessseessseesssseesseeeesserersseesseeessse 302 Language essees 303 Image Commenrt 303 Auto Image Rotation 304 Image Dust Off Ref Photo sesssssssccssecscsessersseecesntecssneeesene 305 Battery Info aniier 307 Wireless Transmitter ssssesssssssesecsessssessecssnseceesssssessecsnseeses 308 Image Authentication 0 esseescccssececsneecessescecsseceeseeecesseeeeeee 308 Copyright Information 309 Save Load Settingg 310 Virtual Horizon 311 FSF IMG TUNS anii 312 Eye Fi Upload sh rssvesceseasscincsscevecesesssecnaxsvacayersenscceen oesseeesennnsiesties 313 Firmware Version sesssssssseessssesssessssesssessssessessssessseesssessseesssees 314 K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies 315 D Lighting ini
58. Picture Control Utility available with ViewNX or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software and then deleted when no longer needed if two memory cards are inserted the card in the primary slot will be used 72 To copy custom Picture Controls to or from the memory card or to delete custom Picture Controls from the memory card highlight pe Load Save in the Manage Picture Control a menu and press PB The following options will M be displayed Copy to camera Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory card to custom Picture Controls C 1 through C 9 on the camera and name them as desired Delete from card Delete selected GB Manage Picture Control custom Picture Controls from the O ene memory card The confirmation Y dialog shown at right will be Sls displayed before a Picture Control is deleted to delete the selected Picture Control highlight Yes and m press Copy to card Copy a custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 from the camera to a selected destination 1 through 99 on the memory card F Delete Picture Control Saving Custom Picture Controls Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time The memory card can only be used to store user created c
59. SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 2 Guide 180100 34 111 38 125 30 98 21 69 10 33 No 180200 48 157 53 174 42 138 30 98 14 46 If a color filter is attached to the SB 900 when AUTO or 4 flash is selected for white balance the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately 2 Controlled remotely with built in flash in commander mode or using optional SB 900 or SB 800 flash unit or SU 800 wireless Speedlight commander 3 m ft 20 C 68 F SB 900 SB 800 and SB 600 at 35 mm zoom head position SB 900 with standard illumination SU 800 Wireless Speedlight Commander When mounted on a CLS compatible camera the SU 800 can be used as a commander for remote SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units The SU 800 itself is not equipped with a flash Guide Number To calculate the range of the flash at full power divide the Guide Number by the aperture For example at ISO 100 the SB 800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft 35mm zoom head position its range at an aperture of f 5 6 is 38 5 6 or about 6 8 meters or in feet 125 5 6 approximately 23 ft 7 in For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two approximately 1 4 The following features are available with the above flash units Flash unit Advanced Wireless Lighting Commande
60. This memory memory card approved card card cannot e Check that contacts be used EHA are clean If card is Card may be Aa damaged contact damaged blinks retailer or Nikon Insert representative another card e Unable to create Delete files or insert 31 220 new folder new memory card Check that Eye Fi 313 card firmware is up to date a E HA Camera can not e Copy files on Eye Fi 31 33 a control Eye Fi card card to a computer blinks f or other device and format card or insert new card memory card CHA SD memory card is Slide card write islocked Slide 7 ug n Ht locked write protect switch to 35 lockto writes alee rotected write position position blinks P i P This cardisnot Far Memory card has Format memory card formatted g cF not been formatted orinsertnewmemory 31 34 Format the Isp R for use in camera card card blinks Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution m Failed to update flash unit firmware Flash cannot be PUE Contact a Nikon used Contacta authorized service camera was not Nikon Updated correct representative authorized P y service representative Select folder No images on containing images Folder x memory card orin from Playback folder contains no f 31 245 imade folder s selected menu or insert ges for playback different memory card No images can be played back until Al
61. To select the focus point manually AF area mode selector 1 Rotate the focus selector lock to This allows the multi selector to be used to select the focus point 2 Select the focus point Use the multi selector to select the focus point The center focus point can be selected by pressing the center of the multi selector The focus selector lock can be rotated to the locked L position following selection to prevent the selected focus point from changing when the multi selector is pressed See Also For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated see Custom Setting a6 AF point illumination N 266 For information on setting focus point selection to wrap around see Custom Setting a7 Focus point wrap around 267 For information on choosing the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector see Custom Setting a8 AF point selection 1 267 For information on changing the role of the multi selector center button see Custom Setting f2 Multi selector center button N 291 79 80 Focus Lock Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition It can also be used when the autofocus system is unable to focus 82 1 Focus Position the subject in the selected focus J N
62. W to highlight the desired setting and press lt or gt to choose a value M 157 Repeat this step until all settings have been adjusted or Quick adiust Sharpening T Contrast E Brightness E Saturation select Quick adjust to choose a preset combination of settings Default settings can be restored by pressing the f button 3 Press Modifications to Original Picture Controls Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are indicated by an asterisk X in the Set Picture Control menu Adjust HE Picture Control Settings Option Description Quick adjust Choose from options between 2 and 2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control note that this resets all manual adjustments For example choosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid Not available with Neutral Monochrome or custom Picture Controls Sharpening Control the sharpness of outlines Select A to adjust sharpening automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 0 no sharpening and 9 the higher the value the greater the sharpening Contrast s101 u0 a4N gt I IlL s uawysn pe jenuey Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 choose lower values to prevent highlights in portrait subjects from being washed out in direct sunlight
63. as shown below Note that the maximum distance at which the remote flash units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions Wireless remote 60 or less 5 m 15 ft or sensors on flash 10 m 33 ft 30 or 7 r Eo units should face camera an in flash e or D K m 15 ft or less a or less 7 Set the remote flash units to the selected channel Turn all the remote flash units on and set them to the channel selected in Step 4 See the flash unit instruction manuals for details 8 Raise the built in flash Press the flash pop up button to raise the built in flash Note that even if is selected for Built in flash gt Mode the built in flash must be raised so that monitor preflashes will be emitted 9 Frame the photograph focus and shoot After confirming that the camera flash ready light and the flash ready lights for all other flash units are lit frame the photograph focus and shoot FV lock M 178 can be used if desired 287 288 The Flash Sync Mode Display 4 does not appear in the control panel flash sync mode display when is selected for Built in flash gt Mode Flash Compensation The flash compensation value selected with the 5 button and sub command dial is added to the flash compensation values selected for the built in flash group A and group B in the Commander mode menu A icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when a flash compensatio
64. automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains 999 photographs Same as for On except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder If the folder is empty file numbering is reset to 0001 RESET Reset 1 File Number Sequence If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph numbered 9999 the shutter release button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken Choose Reset for Custom Setting d7 File number sequence and then either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card 277 278 d8 Information Display MENU button gt Custom Settings menu At the default setting of Auto AUTO the color of the lettering in the information display 2 12 will automatically change from black to white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background To always use the same color lettering select Manual and choose Dark on light B black lettering or Light on dark W white lettering Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the selected text color BSD A OD EIS ai ABT Dark on light Light on dark d9 LCD Illumination MENU button gt Custom Settings menu At the default setting of Off the control panel Peame backlight LCD illuminator will only light while the power switch is rota
65. available for Times 1 4 2 1 8 2 5 1 16 2 10 1 32 2 10 15 1 64 2 10 15 20 25 1 128 2 10 15 20 25 30 35 BE Commander Mode Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units in up to two groups A and B using advanced wireless lighting Selecting this option displays the menu Bo Flash ete for builtin flash shown at right Press or gt tohighlight the S iid td following options A or W to change i Built in flash oy Group A Group B Channel Move Option Description m Choose a flash mode for the built in flash commander flash i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 3 EV Choose the flash level from values between 1 1 and 1 128 1 128 of full power The built in flash does not fire but the AF assist illuminator lights The built in flash must be raised so that it can emit monitor pre flashes GroupA Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 3 EV Auto aperture available only with SB 900 and SB 800 flash AA units Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 1 3 EV Choose the flash level from values between 1 1 and 1 128 TTL TTL M 1 128 of full power The flash un
66. available separately automatically select the correct color space when opening photographs created with the D300S 167 168 Flash Photography Using the Built in Flash This chapter describes how to use the built in flash Mhe Built iE lasiys cs ccsssesaseccscsesanceacescsesescevssscensnczsponsasavsavevorsas 170 Using the Built in Flash ccscssscesssscsssesesecscsosesesssscssees 171 Ela SIMO GES sicsccsacsaseccicansasvecensaeneuctacsscusstecaratasasarconseahqeuvezeninahas 175 ElashiGOMmpensationeccccecsccccscctsccessctetorsetscesossceecsceorereeess 177 EV LOCK E E S veaainesas 178 169 170 The Built in Flash The built in flash has a Guide Number GN 17 56 m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F It supports i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR which uses monitor pre flashes to adjust flash output for balanced lighting not only when natural lighting is inadequate but when filling in shadows and backlit subjects or adding a catch light to the subject s eyes The following types of i TTL flash control are supported i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Flash emits series of nearly invisible preflashes monitor preflashes immediately before main flash Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by 1 005 pixel RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for natural balance between main subject and ambi
67. be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame Bright light sources may leave after images when the camera is panned Jagged edges false colors moir and bright spots may also appear When recording movies avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry In tripod mode movies may be over or under exposed at some aperture settings Before shooting check the brightness of the scene in the monitor if the picture is too bright or too dark end live view and adjust aperture as necessary Note that depending on the brightness of the subject changes to exposure may have no visible effect Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed Recording may end automatically before the maximum file size is reached when recording to memory cards with slow write speeds When used in live view mode for extended periods the camera s internal temperature may rise resulting in image noise and unusual colors the camera may also become noticeably warm but this does not indicated a malfunction To prevent damage to the camera s internal circuits recording will end automatically before the camera overheats A count down display will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends At high ambien
68. by holding the MODE LA IS0 QUAL or WB button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released this also applies to the button to which bracketing is currently assigned M 295 Setting ends when any of the affected buttons is pressed again or the shutter release button is pressed halfway Except when No limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay or an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter is used setting will also end when the exposure meters turn off f10 No Memory Card MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when no memory card is inserted although no pictures will be recorded they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode If Release locked is selected the shutter release button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera Note that when photographs are being captured to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately photographs are not recorded to the camera memory card and the shutter will be enabled regardless of the setting chosen for this option f11 Reverse Indicators MENU button gt Custom Settings menu At the default setting of hetinininintee 07 the exposure indicators in the control panel viewfinder and information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right Select giijihininieh 70 to displ
69. camera body or lens with your left Keep your elbows propped lightly against your torso for support and place one foot half a pace ahead of the other to keep you upper body stable Hold the camera as shown at right when framing photographs in portrait tall orientation Focus and Shoot 1 Press the shutter Focus point release button halfway to focus CO 44 At default settings the camera will focus on the subject in the center focus point Frame a photo in the viewfinder with the main subject positioned in the center focus point and press the shutter release button halfway If the camera is able to focus a beep will sound and the in focus indicator will appear in the viewfinder If the subject is dark the AF assist illuminator may light automatically to assist the focus operation Focus Buffer indicator capacity Viewfinder display Description J Subject in focus J Camera unable to focus on subject in focus blinks point using autofocus While the shutter release button is pressed halfway focus will lock and the number of exposures that can be stored in the memory buffer r T 89 will be shown in the viewfinder display For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus using autofocus see Getting Good Results with Autofocus 82 43 44 2 Press the shutter release button the rest of the way
70. cameras for simultaneous operation length 40 cm 1 ft 4 in Adapter Cord MC 25 Ten pin to two pin adapter cord for connection to devices with two pin terminals including the MW 2 radio control set MT 2 intervalometer and ML 2 modulite control set length 20 cm 8 in GPS Unit GP 1 M 198 Record latitude longitude altitude and UTC time with pictures GPS Adapter Cord MC 35 1 198 Connects GPS devices to D300S via PC cable supplied by manufacturer of GPS device allowing GPS data to be recorded with photographs length 35 cm 1 ft 2 in Modulite Remote Control Set ML 3 Allows infrared remote control at ranges of up to 8 m 26 ft 3 in Caring for the Camera Storage When the camera will not be used for an extended period replace the monitor cover remove the battery and store the battery ina cool dry area with the terminal cover in place To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that e are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60 e are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields such as televisions or radios e are exposed to temperatures above 50 C 122 F or below 10 C 14 F Cleaning Use a blower to remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside Camera wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lig
71. can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in _ Release fe focus In continuous mode frame rate slows for improved focus if the subject is dark or low contrast Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator is displayed Release Es Focus Regardless of the option selected focus will not lock when the in focus indicator is displayed 263 264 a2 AF S Priority Selection MENU button gt Custom Settings menu This option controls whether Focus mode selector when the camera is in focus focus Ip priority or whenever the shutter priority in single servo AF To select single servo AF rotate the focus photographs can be taken only Ja release button is pressed release mode selector to S Option Description Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release Release button is pressed ft Focus Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator is displayed Regardless of the option selected focus will lock while the in focus indicator is displayed a3 Dynamic AF Area MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If the subject leaves the selected focus point when dynamic area AF Q 76 is selected in continuous servo AF focus mode C m 74 the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points Choose the number of focus points f
72. center focus point Playback mode Thumbnail on off f3 Multi selector 1 292 Do nothing f4 Photo info playback 292 Info Playback gt Option Default f5 Assign Fn button M 292 Fn button press None Fn button dials Auto bracketing f6 Assign preview button M 296 Preview button press Preview Preview command dials None f7 Assign AE L AF L button 1 296 AE L AF L button press AE AF lock AE L AF L command dials None f8 Customize command dials M 297 Reverse rotation M 297 No Change main sub 297 Off Aperture setting M 297 Sub command dial Menus and playback M 298 Off f9 Release button to use dial A 298 No f10 No memory card M 299 Enable release f11 Reverse indicators M 299 Hehe Defaults for the current Custom Settings bank can be restored using Reset custom settings M 262 BE Setup Menu Defaults Option Default LCD brightness 301 0 Clean image sensor Clean at startup shutdown Cleaning off HDMI CO 302 Auto Time zone and date M 302 Daylight saving time Off Auto image rotation M 304 On Image authentication A 308 Off GPS 201 Auto meter off Enable Eye Fi upload 313 Enable Exposure Program The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the following graph ISO 200 lens with maximum aperture of f 1 4 and minimum aperture of f 16 e g AF 50mm f
73. control how your camera focuses FOCUS MOG E E 74 AF Area Mode s ccscoverssoncssssucsansacssovesovsesensesnsssscostsoqercsdseavesesxonss 76 FOCUS Point Selection y cs sccssesesveneernensvoneassonsasssarssavssaraoseosrsogs 78 FOCUS LOCK y s cccestvesovensecvcovecsvesssevaverserversvensesstesassyavoravsdavarssosrengs 80 Man all FOCUS svessscccssasssessvoserstovarseasssvesrnvnssavssenenspsveseusseserssesxens 83 73 74 Focus Mode Focus mode is controlled by the Focus mode selector focus mode selector on the front of the camera There are two autofocus AF modes in which the camera focuses automatically when the shutter release button is Ir 9 pressed halfway and one manual focus mode in which focus must be adjusted manually using the focusing ring on the lens Option Description Camera focuses when shutter release button is pressed 5 halfway Focus locks when in focus indicator appears edie tes in viewfinder and remains locked while shutter release g AF button is pressed halfway focus lock At default settings shutter can only be released when in focus indicator is displayed focus priority Camera focuses continuously while shutter release button c is pressed halfway If subject moves camera will engage Continous predictive focus tracking 4175 to predict final distance to s rv AF subject and adjust focus as necessary At default settings shutter can be released whether or not
74. defined with reference to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5 000 5 500 K appear white light sources with a lower color temperature such as incandescent light bulbs appear slightly yellow or red Light sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue 136 Fine Tuning White Balance White balance can be fine tuned to compensate for variations in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image White balance is fine tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial HE The White Balance Menu 1 Select a white balance option To display the menus press the MENU button Select White balance in the shooting menu then highlight a white balance MENU button Ee White balance aA Incandescent Fluorescent Direct sunlight ja Flash E a cout f Shade 3 Choose color temp option and press If an option other than Fluorescent Choose color temp or Preset manual is selected proceed to Step 2 If Fluorescent is selected highlight a lighting type and press gt If Choose color temp is selected highlight a color temperature and press gt If Preset manual is selected choose a preset as described on page 150 before proceeding
75. displays and pictures can not be taken if the camera is turned off before processing is complete the picture will be saved but noise reduction will not be performed In continuous release mode frame rates will slow and while photographs are being processed the capacity of the memory buffer will drop ia F A NORM 258 High ISONR MENU button gt shooting menu Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce noise Option Description HIGH High Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO ________ 800 and higher While photographs are being processed NORM Normal the capacity of the memory buffer will drop Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High LOW Low Normal and Low Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of Hi 0 3 off and higher The amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is selected for High ISO NR 259 260 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings To display the Custom Settings menu press MENU and select the Custom Settings menu tab MENU button Bracketing flash f Controls CUSTOM SETTING MENU Pa Custom setting bant A Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit individual preferences Main menu Custom setting bank RJReset custom settings a Autofocus b Metering exposure
76. exposure M 272 has been set to a value other than zero for any metering method 4 Displayed only if VR lens is attached 212 EE Shooting Data Page 2 J Color space Picture Control 154 3 CE AUTO 0 0 Quick adjust 157 A 1 STANDARD Original Picture Control 3 3 Sharpening 10 E Contrast E Brightness 157 W Saturation 4 157 Filter effects 5 157 F Protect status 2 Retouch indicator White balance Color temperature White balance fine tuning Preset manual TONING Pesscnsssssasssscasscaacenicscstsacssictsenssiacssies 157 315 12 Camera name 133 13 Folder number frame number 256 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode M 247 Standard and Vivid Picture Controls only Neutral Monochrome and custom Picture Controls Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls Monochrome Picture Controls only BE Shooting Data Page 3 1 2 3 4 5 1 Protect StatUS ccsccsssssssssssssssssssesssssseee 219 Ti JE Retouch indicator eenecmmenennene 315 M ENORMA S K High ISO noise reduction sssssssssss 259 ATARUCEILTER Long exposure noise reduction 258 CYANOTYPE b SPRING HAS COME SP 4 Active D Lighting RING HAS COME 3636 H Retouch history JJ mage comment emennenennennenens Camera name 8 Folder number frame number 256 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode M 247
77. higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low contrast subjects Brightness Choose 1 for reduced brightness 1 for enhanced brightness Does not affect exposure Saturation Control the vividness of colors Select A to adjust saturation automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 lower values reduce saturation and higher values increase it Hue Ajuo woypouow uou s u wuzsnfpe jenuew Choose negative values to a minimum of 3 to make reds more purple blues more green and greens more yellow positive values up to 3 to make reds more orange greens more blue and blues more purple Filter effects Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs Choose from Off yellow orange red and green M 158 Toning Ajuo wopouow syuawysn pe jenuew Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from B amp W black and white Sepia Cyanotype blue tinted monochrome Red Yellow Green Blue Green Blue Purple Blue Red Purple 1 159 157 158 M Active D Lighting Contrast and Brightness can not be adjusted when Active D Lighting 1164 is on Any manual adjustments currently in effect will be lost when Active D Lighting is turned on M A Auto Results for auto contrast and saturation vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame Use a type Gor D lens for best res
78. is held down camera records Continuous up to 7 frames per second 2 high speed As for single frame except that beep does not sound when a camera focuses regardless of setting selected for Custom Quiet Setting d1 Beep M 275 and noise made by camera after Fiten shooting from moment following shutter release to point finger is removed from shutter release button when mirror release V is lowered is kept to minimum making this mode less noisy than single frame Use self timer for self portraits or to reduce blurring caused Self timer by camera shake 91 Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto Mup or close up photography or in other situations in which the Mirror up slightest camera movement can result in blurred photographs 0 93 1 Average frame rate with an EN EL3e battery continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 250 s or faster remaining settings other than Custom Setting d5 at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer 2 Average frame rate with an EN EL3e battery continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 1 250 s or faster other settings at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer 86 To choose a release mode press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setting Release mode dial lock release Release mode dia
79. is poor AF Micro 200mm f 4D ED AF S DX 17 55mm f 2 8G ED AF S VR 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G ED AF S NIKKOR 24 70mm f 2 8G ED e AF Micro 70 180mm f 4 5 5 6D ED AF S 28 70mm f 2 8D ED AF S 17 35mm f 2 8D ED At ranges under 1 1m 3ft 7in the following lens may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor AF S DX VR 55 200mm f 4 5 6G ED At ranges under 1 5m 4ft 11in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor AF S DX NIKKOR 18 200mm AF 80 200mm f 2 8D ED 3 5 5 6G ED VR II AF S VR 70 300mm f 4 5 5 6G ED AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED AF S NIKKOR 14 24mm f 2 8G ED AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D At ranges under 2 3m 7ft 7in the following lens may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor AF VR 80 400mm f 4 5 5 6D ED Calculating Picture Angle The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 x 24 mm The size of the area exposed by the D300S in contrast is approximately 23 6 x 15 8 mm meaning that the diagonal picture angle of a 35mm camera is approximately 1 5 times that of the D300S To calculate the focal length of lenses for the D300S in 35mm format multiply the focal length of the lens by 1 5 for example the effective focal length of a 24mm lens in 35mm format would be 36 mm when mounted on the D300S Picture size 35mm format 36 x 2
80. menu Choose g0N On to embed image authentication information in new photographs as they are taken allowing alterations to be detected using Nikon s optional Image Authentication software Image authentication information can not be embedded in existing photographs Photographs taken with image authentication on are marked with a fg icon on the file information and overview pages of the photo information display M 208 215 308 1 Camera Control Pro 2 Image authentication information is not embedded in TIFF RGB photographs recorded directly to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Copies Image authentication information is not embedded in copies created using the options in the retouch menu M 315 Copyright Information MENU button gt Y Setup menu Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken Copyright information is visible on the fourth shooting data page in the photo information display M 214 and can be viewed as metadata in ViewNxX supplied or in Capture NX 2 available separately M 355 Done Save changes and return to the setup menu Artist Enter a photographer name as described on page 255 Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long Copyright Enter the name of the copyright holder as described on page 255 Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters long Attach copyright information Select this ii option to attac
81. mode HDMI Time zone and date excepting date and time Language Setup Image comment Auto image rotation Image authentication Copyright information GPS Non CPU lens data All My Menu items My Menu All recent settings R t Setti Seer eae Choose tab Settings saved using the D300S can be restored by selecting Load settings Note that Save load settings is only available when a memory card is inserted in the camera and that the Load settings option is only available if the card contains saved settings Saved Settings able to load settings if the file name is changed Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP5 The camera will not be Virtual Horizon MENU button gt Setup menu Display a virtual horizon based on information from the camera image sensor The reference line is displayed in green when the camera is level vV Tilting the Camera The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back If the camera is unable to measure tilt the virtual horizon will not be displayed E Virtual horizon Reference line A 311 AF Fine Tune MENU button gt Setup menu Fine tune focus for up to 12 lens types AF tuning is not recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal focus use only when required Option Description put On Turn AF tu
82. multi selector to view areas of areas of image not visible in monitor Keep multi image selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame Navigation window is displayed when zoom ratio is altered area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border view a Rotate main command dial to view same other lt location in other images at current zoom ratio images RA g i Faces up to 10 detected during zoom are indicated by white borders in the Select eee en faces navigation window Rotate sub command dial to scroll display to faces without changing zoom ratio Change EE protect On See page 219 for more information status Retur e A Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken shooting vB diatel mod Za immediately Display MENU See page 243 for more information menus 218 Protecting Photographs from Deletion In full frame zoom and thumbnail playback the O button can be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion Protected files can not be deleted using the button or the Delete option in the playback menu Note that protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted 4 34 301 To protect a photograph 1 Select an image Display the image in full frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the thumbnail list 2 Press the On button The photograph will be marked with a icon To remove protection from the photograph
83. note that if the value selected for Maximum sensitivity is lower than the value currently selected for ISO sensitivity the value selected for Maximum sensitivity will be used In exposure modes F and A sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter speed 4000 1 s Slower shutter speeds may be used if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity Press to exit when settings are complete When On is selected the control paneland S 125 F55 viewfinder show ISO AUTO When sensitivity ng sD ISO AUTO_ is altered from the value selected by the al ae ac user these indicators blink and the altered value is shown in the viewfinder Auto ISO Sensitivity Control Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise see page 259 When a flash is used the value selected for Minimum shutter speed is ignored in favor of the option selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 281 Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes available with the built in flash and SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 flash units possibly preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter speeds 99 100 Exposure Controlling How the Camera Sets Exposure
84. selecting amp tab 2 Only available if is pressed in full frame playback when a retouched image or original is displayed 315 Creating Retouched Copies To create a retouched copy 1 Choosea picture Display the desired picture in full frame playback CO 204 Retouch The camera may not be able to display or retouch images created with other devices 2 Display the retouch menu 2 D Red eye correction j M Tri Press to display the retouch es menu Q Filter effects 2 Color balance Dancel See Also See page 227 for information on using the button with the WT 4 wireless transmitter 3 Display retouch options Monochrome Highlight the desired item in pataani Sepia the retouch menu and press 8 Cyanatype Dancel 316 4 Select retouch options For more information see the section for the selected item To return to full frame playback without creating a retouched copy press gt Monitor off Delay The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for 20 s The delay can be adjusted with Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay 5 Create a retouched copy Press to create a retouched copy Retouched copies are indicated by a amp 4 icon Creating Retouched Copies from the Retouch Menu The photographs to be retouched can also be selected from the retouch menu a R
85. shifting lens 10 Exposure compensation required when used with Al 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 Al 35 105mm f 3 5 4 5 Al 35 135mm f 3 5 4 5 or AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D See teleconverter manual for details 11 With maximum effective aperture of f 5 6 or faster 12 Requires PK 12 or PK 13 auto extension ring PB 6D may be required depending on camera orientation 13 Use preset aperture In aperture priority auto exposure mode set aperture using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking photograph PF 4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA 4 Camera Holder Compatible Non CPU Lenses If lens data are specified using Non CPU lens data N 195 many of the features available with CPU lenses can also be used with non CPU lenses If lens data are not specified color matrix metering can not be used and center weighted metering is used when matrix metering is selected Non CPU lenses can only be used in exposure modes f and M when aperture must be set using the lens aperture ring If the maximum aperture has not been specified using Non CPU lens data the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum aperture the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring Aperture priority auto will be selected automatically in exposure modes P and 5 The exposure mode indicator F or 5 in the control panel will blink and A will be displayed in the viewfinder m Incompatible Accessories and Non CPU Lenses The f
86. shooting E Start time 4 E 50 oo EE E 00 01 00 001 x E amp Move 4 Choose an interval Press lt or gt to highlight hours minutes or seconds press A or W to change Choose an interval longer than the slowest anticipated shutter speed Press to continue i Interval timer shooting e Olnterval w a a ie eo By 13 50 00 01 00 001 x 1 0001 E amp Move Set 5 Choose the number of intervals and number of shots per interval Press lt or gt to highlight number of intervals or number of shots press A or W to change Press gt to continue er ww 003 x2 Number of Number Total of shots number of interval shots ie Interval timer shooting no of shots 6 start shooting Highlight Start gt On and press to return to the shooting l X menu without starting the interval timer highlight o Wee Start gt Off and press The first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time or after about 3 s if Now was selected for Choose start time in Step 2 Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken Note that because shutter speed and the time needed to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to shot the interval between a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary If shooting can not proceed at current settings for example if a shutter speed of tit amp is currently selected in manua
87. space 166 Active D Lighting 164 Long exp NR 258 High ISO NR 259 ISO sensitivity settings 96 Live view mode 49 52 Multiple exposure 184 Movie settings 62 Interval timer shooting 189 253 254 Shooting Menu Bank MENU button gt shooting menu Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks With the exceptions of Interval timer shooting Multiple exposure and modifications to Picture Controls quick adjust and other manual adjustments changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others To store a particular combination of frequently used settings select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off and will be restored the next time the bank is selected Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A B C and D A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option as described below Shooting Menu Bank The current menu bank is shown in the information display which can be viewed by pressing the M button ae A OTe PSD ER i ABT BE Renaming Shooting Menu Banks Selecting Rename in the Shooting menu bank menu displays the list of shooting menu banks shown in Step 1 1 Select a bank
88. subject is in focus release priority Camera does not focus automatically focus must be M adjusted manually using the lens focusing ring If Manul maximum aperture of lens is f 5 6 or faster viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm focus electronic m 83 range finding O 84 but photographs can be taken at any time whether or not subject is in focus Choose single servo AF for landscapes and other stationary subjects Continuous servo AF may be a better choice with erratically moving subjects Manual focus is recommended when the camera is unable to focus using autofocus The AF 0N Button For the purpose of focusing the camera AF ON button pressing the AF ON button has the same effect as pressing the shutter release button halfway note however that vibration reduction available with VR lenses can only be engaged by pressing the shutter release button halfway Predictive Focus Tracking In continuous servo AF the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the AF ON button is pressed This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released See Also For information on using focus priority in continuous servo AF see Custom Setting a1 AF C priority selection Q 263 For information on using release priority i
89. the lens aperture ring 110 M Manual In manual exposure mode you control both shutter speed and aperture To take photographs in manual exposure mode 1 Select exposure mode Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until M is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel MODE button Main command dial 111 2 Choose aperture and shutter speed While the exposure meters are on rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed and the sub command dial to set aperture Shutter speed can be set x 25 or to values between 30s and s 000 s or the shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time exposure turk amp O 114 Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and maximum values for the lens Check exposure in the exposure indicators see page 113 and continue to adjust shutter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is achieved Sub command dial Aperture A oe Al Shutter speed a Main command dial 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot Shutter speed 1 250 s aperture f 8 AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses Provided that an external exposure meter is used the exposure ratio need only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture 112 Exposure Indicators The exposure indicators in the control panel and viewfinder show whe
90. this chapter for information on compatible accessories cleaning and storing the camera and what to do if an error message is displayed or you encounter problems using the camera Compatible Lenses cceisccc ccossccozsstesnserectes sosstesssstssccecsnesecsees 340 Optional Flash Units Speedlights ecccsssesseeseeee 347 Other Accessories cccsccesecesssctscstetaccscocssveatastosscesesasscecsscors 352 Caring for the Camera scesssscsssesscscscsssesssecessecesecesseee 357 Storage Cleaning AS EONA EA I a ree tacteccece ee teeter KNEA TINON O OA t eiaereatens Clean at Startup Shutdown Manual Clen Ngano e No Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions 04 364 DIAE E E E S 368 EXDOSUNEIPKOGK al raccrsseccecerecsercessscnsstcorscceretcarecsascecaccesscczsases 372 I EE eT a A E E 373 ErromMeSSAGES ccccscsccoseccssccecssstesccscsctesvescoscstvaceccosssacstsatcacestss 378 SPECIFICATIONS siccrccscsecccsosecscsetsccncesectscoesvectsvensstsccucecouteessiocesies 385 Approved Memory Catds scscccscsssssssscssscsssesecsssesesees 393 Memory Card Capacity cscscsscsscsssssssssssssssesssesssseseesees 394 Battery Eine ysis svisescccscscscsecctarecsscctscacepovecavencasncursrsvvesscancagueveree 396 339 Compatible Lenses CPU lenses particularly types G and D are recommended for use with the D300S CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts type G and D len
91. trip take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction Life Long Learning As part of Nikon s Life Long Learning commitment to ongoing product support and education continually updated information is available on line at the following sites For users in the U S A http www nikonusa com For users in Europe and Africa http www europe nikon com support For users in Asia Oceania and the Middle East http www nikon asia com Visit these sites to keep up to date with the latest product information tips answers to frequently asked questions FAQs and general advice on digital imaging and photography Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area See the following URL for contact information http imaging nikon com xxiv Introduction This chapter covers information you will need to know before using the camera including the names of camera parts OVERVICW2itscccccrstscetsssctecssestucosctestsctscesetatvecoveatestesaciceterssecaacetsttes 2 Getting to Know the Camera sssssssssssscsesesscscsesesesscees 3 Camera Body The Control Panel The Viewfinder Display ssssssesscsssesccssssscssseecsnseeccsseessseecsnssesnsseees 10 The Information Display ssccsssscsssecsssccsssccsscsssecsseccsssecssscesseecssceesees 12 Th
92. tuning 140 Color temperature 141 White balance preset number 151 Number of shots in exposure flash or white balance bracketing sequence 121 125 Number of intervals for interval timer photography 192 Focal length non CPU lenses 197 Flash sync indicator Flexible program indicator H Exposure mode KJ mage size 71 Image quality sscsssssecssssssssseessessssee 69 Auto area AF indicator 77 AF area mode indicator ees000 77 3D tracking indicator 77 265 White balance fine tuning E iNdicaAtO ssicecscasssecacveasacsteconassetstesssioecs 140 15 14 Kla ar a TFAA kEi REAR eee re ee ee Oe Sm UULANNO L I 12 K 11 AHK pane J l 10 White balance K appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures Exposure indicator Exposure compensation indicator Bracketing progress indicator Exposure and flash bracketing 121 WB bracketing ADL bracketing PC connection indicator 13 Flash mode Aperture f number 0 109 112 Aperture number of stops 110 343 Bracketing increment 122 126 Number of shots in ADL bracketing SOQUEMCE scscssssnssssscssssnssssacsavzossczersnssioe 129 Number of shots per interval 192 Maximum aperture NON CPU lenses vescssssessessessess 197 PC mode indicator 15 Aperture stop indicator 110 343 16 30 17 29 E
93. with image authentication 1 308 on have been modified after shooting Note Use the latest versions of Nikon software Most Nikon software offers an auto update feature when the computer is connected to the Internet See the websites listed on page xxiv for the latest information on supported operating systems Body cap BF 1A Body Cap The body cap keeps the mirror viewfinder screen and low pass filter free of dust when a lens is notin place Remote terminal accessories The D300S is equipped with a ten pin remote terminal for remote control and automatic photography The terminal is provided with a cap which protects the contacts when the terminal is not in use The following accessories can be used all lengths are approximate Remote Cord MC 22 Remote shutter release with blue yellow and black terminals for connection to a remote shutter triggering device allowing control via sound or electronic signals length 1 m 3 ft 3 in Remote Cord MC 30 Remote shutter release can be used to reduce camera shake length 80 cm 2 ft 7 in Remote Cord MC 36 Remote shutter release can be used for interval timer photography or to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure length 85 cm 2 ft 9 in Extension Cord MC 21 Can be connected to ML 3 or MC series 20 22 23 25 30 or 36 Only one MC 21 can be used at a time length 3 m 9 ft 10 in Connecting Cord MC 23 Connects two
94. with linear polarizing filters Use the C PL circular polarizing filter instead Use NC and L37C filters to protect the lens To prevent ghosting use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed against a bright light or when a bright light source is in the frame Center weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors filter factors over 1x Y44 Y48 Y52 056 R60 XO X1 C PL ND2S ND4 ND4S ND8 ND8S ND400 A2 A12 B2 B8 B12 See the filter manual for details Nikon Speedlights SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 Optional flash Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB R200 units Wireless Speedlight Commander SU 800 See page 348 for more information Water guards Water Guard WG AS2 The optional WG AS2 is a water guard that covers the base of SB 900 flash units mounted on the D300S increasing the SB 900 s splash resistance by protecting the accessory shoe contacts from rain and spray PC card adapters EC AD1 PC Card Adapter The EC AD1 PC card adapter allows Type CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in PCMCIA card slots Software Capture NX 2 A complete photo editing package with such advanced editing features as selection control points and an auto retouch brush Camera Control Pro 2 Control the camera remotely from a computer and save photographs directly to the computer hard disk Image Authentication Determine whether photographs taken
95. with the subject positioned anywhere in the frame 48 Hand held A Choose when taking hand held shots of moving subjects or when framing photographs at angles that make it difficult to use the viewfinder M 52 Camera focuses normally using phase detection autofocus Phase Detection Versus Contrast Detect AF The camera normally uses phase detection autofocus in which focus is adjusted based on data from a special focusing sensor When Tripod is selected in live view however the camera uses contrast detect autofocus in which the camera analyses the data from the image sensor and adjusts focus to produce the greatest contrast Contrast detect autofocus takes longer than phase detection autofocus Tripod Mode 3 1 Frame a picture in the viewfinder With the camera mounted on a tripod or resting on a stable level surface frame the subject in the viewfinder Choose Tripod for Live view mode MENU button pe Live view mode oa To display the menus fF press the MENU button oe Highlight Tripod in the g Live view mode menu 2 and press 3 Press the button The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor instead of the viewfinder button 49 50 4 Focus Autofocus focus mode S or In tripod mode the focus point for contrast detect autofocus can be moved to any point in the f
96. 0 or above are recommended See Also For information on Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value see page 270 For information on using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities see page 259 97 98 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt ISO sensitivity auto control in the shooting menu ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the value selected by the user ISO sensitivity is adjusted appropriately when the flash is used 1 Select ISO sensitivity MENU button auto control Ss S _ ra Gy Active Dighting OFF 7 P J Long exp NR OFF To display the menus S ish ISO NR NORN 3 press the MENU button 1 s DE Pr et Multiple exposure OFF Select ISO sensitivity Mas snti settings in the shooting K amp D Interval timer shooting OFF menu highlight ISO sensitivity auto control and press gt 2 Select On 150 sensitivity settings fel 1S0 sensitivity auto control Highlight On and press if Off is selected ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by the user 3 Adjust settings Ba 150 sensitiv A ISO sensitivi The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity auto control LON P ISO sensitivity can be selected a TERE a using Maximum sensitivity the minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 200
97. 1 Viewfinder eyepiece scccsee 36 IF Om protect button 219 B DK 23 rubber eyecup 91 191 M help button ssssssssssssssssressssssssss 21 t delete button 46 220 QE thumbnail playback i emt format DUTTON 0 seessseeeeeeeee 34 i ZOOM out DUTTON ees 216 P playback button 45 204 amp playback zoom in 5 MONON cscsssssssesecccscesseeees 45 47 204 button nssssssssssssssesssesssrssserssnessesssserss 218 E MENU menu button 18 243 B OK button eens 19 1 Diopter adjustment control 36 8 Memory card slot cove 31 JE Metering selector 103 E Focus selector lock esmsessmeneenes 78 art AE AF lock Memory card access lamp 33 44 DUTON sessisississscceviscrsisnvsss 80 81 296 11 AF area mode SelECtOF ceceeceecececeoeee 76 4 AF ON AF ON button 50 59 75 PA Speakers 63 64 JH Main command dial 297 E M info Dutton essnssnstsnnrsen 12 J Multi selector esses 19 H live view button 49 52 58 7 Multi selector center button wu eeecsseesseeseees 19 59 63 291 The Control Panel 1 Color temperature indicator 141 Shutter speed scsssescssseecceeee 108 112 Exposure compensation value 118 Flash compensation value 177 ISO sensitivity oe ees seeeccseecsseecnteeeneee 96 White balance fine
98. 12 a6 AF Point Illumination MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the viewfinder Option Description Aute The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as needed to establish contrast with the background The selected focus point is always highlighted regardless of On the brightness of the background Depending on the brightness of the background the selected focus point may be difficult to see Off The selected focus point is not highlighted 266 a7 Focus Point Wrap Around MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose whether focus point selection wraps around from one edge of the viewfinder to another Option Description Focus point selection wraps around from top to bottom ofn EEDA bottom to top right to left and left e Wrap to right so that for example pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted D selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display The focus area display is bounded by the outermost focus Nowrap points so that for example pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the display is selected has no effect a8 AF Point Selection MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus point selection Option Description _ C
99. 137 138 2 Fine tune white balance E White balance a Use the multi selector to fine tune white balance White balance can be fine tuned on the amber A blue B axis and the green G magenta M Coordinates Adjustment axis The horizontal amber blue axis corresponds to color temperature with each increment equivalent to about 5 mired The vertical green magenta axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color compensation CC filters Increase green Green G Blue B Amber A Increase magenta Magenta M Increase blue Increase amber Press 8 Press to save settings and return to the shooting menu If white balance has been fine tuned on the A B axis a lt gt icon will be displayed in the control panel White Balance Fine Tuning The colors on the fine tuning axes are relative not absolute For example moving the cursor to B blue when a warm setting such as incandescent is selected for white balance will make photographs slightly colder but will not actually make them blue R Color Temperature Fine Tuning White balance x Choose color temp When Choose color temp is selected you can view the color temperature while fine tuning white balance Mired Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures Fo
100. 4 mm Lens Picture diagonal Picture size D300S 23 6 x 15 8 mm Picture angle 35mm format Picture angle D300S Optional Flash Units Speedlights The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS and can be used with CLS compatible flash units Optional flash units can be attached directly to the camera accessory shoe as described below The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for flash units with a locking pin such as the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 1 Remove the accessory shoe cover 2 Mount the flash unit on the accessory shoe See the manual provided with the flash unit for details The built in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is attached The Sync Terminal A sync cable can be connected to the sync terminal as required Do not connect another flash unit via a sync cable when performing rear curtain sync flash photography with a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS Nikon s advanced Creative Lighting System CLS offers improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography HE CLS Compatible Flash Units The camera can be used with the following CLS compatible flash units The SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 Flash unit Feature SB 900
101. Banks Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks 254 If shooting menu settings are reset using the Reset shooting menu item in the shooting menu M 256 interval timer settings will be reset as follows e Choose start time Now Number of shots 1 Interval 00 01 00 Start shooting Off Number of intervals 1 Non CPU Lenses By specifying lens data lens focal length and maximum aperture the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using anon CPU lens 342 If the focal length of the lens is known Power zoom can be used with SB 900 SB 800 and SB 600 flash units available separately e Lens focal length is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display When the maximum aperture of the lens is known e The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder e Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture e Aperture is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens e Enables color matrix metering note that it may be necessary to use center weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses including Reflex NIKKOR lenses Improves the precision of center weighted and spot metering and i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Focal Length Not Listed If the correct focal length is not listed choose the closest value g
102. Control M 154 Standard Color space M 166 sRGB Active D Lighting 165 Off Long exp NR 2 258 Off High ISO NR 259 Normal ISO sensitivity settings A 96 ISO sensitivity A 96 200 ISO sensitivity auto control A 98 Off Live view mode M 49 52 Tripod Multiple exposure Q 184 Reset Movie settings 1 62 Quality 640 x 424 3 2 Microphone Auto sensitivity A Destination CF card slot Interval timer shooting 2 189 Reset 1 Default settings can be restored using Reset shooting menu M 256 With the exception of Multiple exposure and Interval timer shooting only settings in the current shooting menu bank will be reset 2 Applies to all banks Reset shooting menu can not be selected while shooting is in progress 3 Applies to all banks Shooting ends when reset is performed EE Custom Settings Menu Defaults Option Default a1 AF C priority selection 1 263 Release a2 AF S priority selection A 264 Focus a3 Dynamic AF area M 264 9 points a4 Focus tracking with lock on M 266 Normal a5 AF activation CH 266 Shutter AF ON a6 AF point illumination M 266 Auto a7 Focus point wrap around M 267 No wrap a8 AF point selection M 267 51 points a9 Built in AF assist illuminator M 268 On a10 AF ON for MB D10 M 269 AF ON b1 ISO sensitivity step value 1 270 1 3 step b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl A 270
103. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle 1 USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard 4 Turn the camera on 225 5 Transfer photographs Nikon Transfer will start automatically click the Start Transfer button to transfer photographs for more information on using Nikon Transfer select Nikon Transfer help from the Nikon Transfer Help menu Start Transfer button 226 Turn the camera off Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when transfer is complete m During Transfer Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress 1 Close the Connector Cover Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use Foreign matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer Wireless and Ethernet Networks If the optional WT 4 wireless transmitter 1 352 is attached photographs can be transferred or printed over wireless or Ethernet networks and the camera can also be controlled from network computers running Camera Control Pro 2 available separately The WT 4 can be used in any of the following modes Mode Function Upload new or existing photographs to computer or ftp server Transfer mode Thumbnail Preview photo
104. ETOUCH MENU iy Color balance Dlighting Red eye correction F N mama y Monochrome i gt y 100 7 noo gt Filter effects gA Color balance Td Zoom Image overlay kz El NEF RAW processing E ancel Highlight an option Highlight a picture Create retouched copy and press and press of selected picture OOSave 317 318 vV Retouching Copies Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch options although with the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit movie each option can only be applied once note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail Options that can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and unavailable Image Quality Except in the case of copies created with Trim Image overlay NEF RAW processing and Resize copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the original copies created from NEF RAW photos are saved as large fine quality JPEG images and copies created from TIFF RGB photos are saved as fine quality JPEG images of the same size as the original Size priority compression is used when copies are saved in JPEG format D Lighting MENU button gt gh retouch menu D lighting brightens shadows making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs Press A or W to choose the amount of correction performed The effect can be previewed in the edit display Press to copy the photograph Peed BUE L
105. Flash White balance uu 134 Flash bracketing 120 289 290 Flash cntrl for built in flash 283 Flash compensation Flash control Flash mode Flash only Auto bracketing set 120 289 Flash range ssssss sceassnsesessdscdesssosszcriovtiestee 174 Flash ready indicator Flash shutter speed Flash sync speed Flash sync terminal Flexible program sssssssssssesesecsseseeeee Fluorescent White balance 134 Fn button 121 125 129 179 292 f number Focal length a 26 84 Focal length scale Focal plane mark FOCUS sinanasi 73 74 76 78 80 83 Focus indicator 43 84 Focus lock 80 Focus mode 74 Focus mode switch wae 27 Focus point 50 76 78 264 267 Focus point wrap around sss 267 FOCUS tracking ssseesceeesees 75 265 266 Focus tracking with lock on Focusing screen Format Format memory card Frame interval Slide show Front curtain sync Full frame playback FV lock GPS 198 214 GPS data 214 GPS unit H HAN hel cecssescsssssscsseccssseecsssecsssseeeseses 52 IDM vcinasssssoisinnnesenincasenvanente 241 302 392 HDMI mini pin connector Hide image High definition High ISO NR Highlights Histogram l Image authentication Image comment Image Dust Off ref photo Image file Image overlay Im
106. H Exposure compensation A Depth of field preview button display sinies 118 ASS JNMEN eseccssescccssseccesseecssnseeesseee 296 FI Flash compensation EE Color space indicator osssssssssssessee 166 indicator E Active D Lighting indicator 165 EZ Interval timer indicator P High ISO noise reduction Eye Fi connection indicator 313 indicator KJ GPS connection indicator 200 Eg Shooting menu bank yA Exposure and flash Multiple exposure indicator 186 bracketing indicator WB bracketing indicator 121 38 ADL bracketing amount 125 EJ Copyright information vz bracketing indicator sm Clock not set indicator EJ Metering smn Gi Image comment indicator s 303 EE Camera battery indicator 37 E Release mode single frame H MB D10 battery type display continuous indicator s s 86 Me Rie battery IMGiCAtOL reese Continuous shooting speed 88 g Beep indicator sssssssvssss1sssss1ss 111 8 FV lock indicator essssssssssesssssseessssee 179 BE Changing Settings in the Information Display To change settings for the items listed below press the M button in the information display Highlight items using the multi selector and press to view options for the highlighted item button E phooting Inenu tjank I 8 7 6 JE Shooting menu bank 254 J Fn button assignment 292 B High ISO noise
107. IT DS amp Zoom ave 319 Red Eye Correction MENU button gt gh retouch menu This option is used to correct red eye caused by the flash and is available only with photographs taken using the flash The photograph selected for red eye correction is a previewed as shown at right Confirm the EA effects of red eye correction and create a copy as described in the following table Note that red eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red eye check the preview thoroughly before arel Zoom Save proceeding To Use Description Press amp button to zoom in MA Redeye correction Zoomin Q QE button to zoom out P While photo is zoomed in use multi selector to view Zoom out QE areas of image not visible in monitor Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame Navigation window is displayed when zoom buttons or multi selector is pressed area currently visible in Cancel zoom monitor is indicated by yellow border Press to cancel zoom If the camera detects red eye in the selected R photograph a copy will be created that has been processed to reduce its effects No copy will be created if the camera is unable to detect red eye View other areas of image Create copy 320 Trim MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create a crop
108. Info P layback MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If Info A V Playback lt P gt is selected pressing PEIEE A or in full frame playback changes the j photo information displayed while pressing Po G lt or P displays additional images To reverse f the role of the multi selector buttons so that pressing A or W displays additional images and pressing lt or gt changes the photo information displayed select Info lt q gt PlaybackAY This setting also applies to the multi selector on the optional MB D10 battery pack 2 f5 Assign Fn Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the Fn button either by itself Fn button press or when used in combination with the command dials Fn button dials Q BE Fn Button Press Selecting Fn button press for Custom Setting f5 displays the following options Option Description Preview Press the Fn button to preview depth of field 2 105 Press the Fn button to lock flash value built in flash FV lock and SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units only 178 Press again to cancel FV lock B AEAF lock Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is pressed Ma AElockonly Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed and AE lock remains locked until the button is pressed a second ME Reset on i time th
109. K oy 1 2 1 2 step 1 tste b3 Exp Comp Fine Tune MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Select the increments used when making EE adjustments to exposure and flash z compensation Tee T V2 W2step T1 iste b4 Easy Exposure Compensation MENU button gt Custom Settings mens This option controls whether the f button is needed to set exposure compensation M 118 If On Auto reset or On is selected the 0 at the center of the exposure display will blink even when exposure compensation is set to 0 Option Description Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the command dials see note below The setting selected using the command dial is reset when the camera or exposure meters turn off exposure compensation settings selected using the f button are not reset RESET On Auto reset As above except that the exposure compensation On value selected using the command dial is not reset when the camera or exposure meters turn off Exposure compensation is set by pressing the Off f button and rotating the main command dial Change Main Sub The dial used to set exposure compensation when On Auto reset or On is selected for Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f8 Customize command dials gt Change main sub 2 297 Customize command dials gt Change main sub Off On as P Sub command dial S
110. Medical NIKKOR 120mm f 4 Vv Vv Vv Reflex NIKKOR Yvi vt v PC NIKKOR v Y v vY Al type Teleconverter v Y vt ivy PB 6 Bellows Focusing 7 3 Attachment Z is scl Ne tal ical eae cd Auto extension rings PK x series 11A 12 or 13 PN 11 a eas A 1 Some lenses can not be used see page 343 2 Range of rotation for Al 80 200mm f 2 8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera body Filters can not be exchanged while Al 200 400mm f 4 ED is mounted on camera 3 With maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster 4 If maximum aperture is specified using Non CPU lens data M 195 aperture value will be displayed in viewfinder and control panel 5 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non CPU lens data M 195 Use spot or center weighted metering if desired results are not achieved 6 For improved precision specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using Non CPU lens data 2 195 7 Can be used in manual exposure mode at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more 8 Electronic rangefinder can not be used with shifting or tilting 9 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture In aperture priority auto exposure mode preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE lock and shifting lens In manual exposure mode preset aperture using lens aperture ring and determine exposure before
111. Nikon DIGITAL CAMERA D30OQOs User s Manual Where to Find It Find what you re looking for from The Table of Contents CO x xvii Find items by function or menu name The Q amp A Index M iv ix Know what you want to do but don t know the function name Find it from the question and answer index The Index C 398 403 Search by key word Error Messages LL 378 384 If a warning is displayed in the viewfinder or monitor find the solution here Troubleshooting Q 373 377 Camera behaving unexpectedly Find the solution here A For Your Safety Before using the camera for the first time read the safety instructions in For Your Safety A xviii xx Help Use the camera s on board help feature for help on menu items and other topics See page 21 for details Digitutor Digitutor a series of watch and learn manuals in movie form is available from the following website http www nikondigitutor com index_eng html Package Contents Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera Memory cards are sold separately D300S digital camera BF 1A body BM 8monitor BS 1 OQ 3 cap cover M 16 accessory ZO 26 355 shoe cover A 347 EN EL3e MH 18a quick DK 5 eyepiece cap rechargeable Li ion charger with power 91 191 battery with terminal cable 22 cover 1 a ia DK 23 rubber eyecup 91 191 EG D2 audio video UC E4 USB cable AN DC4 stra
112. TL auto and manual modes If they are set to TTL the camera shutter release button will lock and no photographs can be taken Flashunit SB 80DX SB 30 SB 27 SB 28DX cp copy 58225 5822 secon SB 28 SB 26 B 20 ai Flash mode SB 25 SB 24 SB 16B SB 15 A Non TTL auto Vv Y M Manual Yv Vv Vv Vv m Repeating flash Vv REAR Rear curtain sync Vv Vv Vv Vv 1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter release is disabled Set flash unit to A non TTL auto flash 2 Autofocus is only available with AF Micro lenses 60 mm 105 mm or 200 mm M Notes on Optional Flash Units Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions If the unit supports CLS refer to the section on CLS compatible digital SLR cameras The D300S is not included in the digital SLR category in the SB 80DX SB 28DX and SB 50DX manuals i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 3200 At values over 3200 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings If the flash ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed When an SC series 17 28 or 29 sync cable is used for off camera flash photography correct exposure may not be achieved in i TTL mode We recommend that you select standard i TTL flash control Take a test shot and view the
113. Type Type Single lens reflex digital camera Lens mount Nikon F mount with AF coupling and AF contacts Effective pictureangle Approx 1 5 x lens focal length Nikon DX format Effective pixels Effective pixels 12 3 million Image sensor Image sensor 23 6 x 15 8 mm CMOS sensor Total pixels 13 1 million Dust reduction System Image sensor cleaning Image Dust Off reference data requires optional Capture NX 2 software Storage Image size pixels 4 288 x 2 848 L e 3 216 x 2 136 M 2 144 x 1 424 S File format NEF RAW 12 or 14 bit lossless compressed compressed or uncompressed TIFF RGB JPEG JPEG Baseline compliant with fine approx 1 4 normal approx 1 8 or basic approx 1 16 compression Size priority Optimal quality compression available NEF RAW JPEG Single photograph recorded in both NEF RAW and JPEG formats Picture Control System Can be selected from Standard Neutral Vivid Monochrome selected Picture Control can be modified storage for custom Picture Controls Media Type CompactFlash memory cards UDMA compliant SD Secure Digital memory cards SDHC compliant Storage Dual card slots Either card can be used for primary or backup storage or for separate storage of copies created using NEF JPEG pictures can be copied between cards File system DCF Design Rule for Camera File System 2
114. Viewing Photographs on TV The supplied EG D2 audio video A V cable can be used to connect the D300S to a television or VCR for playback or recording A type C mini pin High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI cable available separately from commercial sources can be used to connect the camera to high definition video devices Standard Definition Devices To connect the camera to a standard television 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the A V cable 2 Connect the supplied A V cable as shown Connect to camera 4 re M e Video yellow A Connect to y video device TD 3 Tune the television to the video channel CE 4 Turn the camera on and press gt button During playback images will be displayed both on the television screen and in the camera monitor 239 240 Video Mode If no image is displayed check that camera is correctly connected and that the option selected for Video mode M 301 matches the video standard used in the TV Television Playback Use of an EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter available separately is recommended for extended playback When the EH 5a or EH 5 is connected the camera monitor off delay will be fixed at ten minutes and the exposure meters will no longer turn off automatically Note that the edge
115. ach shot will be processed to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program and each copy will have a different white balance Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine tuning If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than the number of exposures remaining the exposure count displays in the control panel and viewfinder will flash and the shutter release will be disabled Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted 127 128 BE Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero GF and is no longer displayed in the control panel The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset M 182 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated White Balance Bracketing White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF RAW Selecting NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG fine NEF RAW JPEG normal or NEF RAW JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing White balance bracketing affects only color temperature the amber blue axis in the white balance fine tuning display A 138 No adjustments are made on the green magenta axis
116. ack P lt l if Microphone off is selected for Microphone in Movie settings menu 63 64 Editing Movies Trim unwanted footage to create edited copies of movies 1 Display retouch options Display a movie in full frame playback and press to display retouch options 2 Select Edit movie Highlight Edit movie and press gt C Cancet 3 Choose an option Edit movie To trim the opening footage from the copy highlight Choose end point Choose start point and press Select Choose end point to cance trim the ending footage 4 View the movie and choose a starting or end point Press the center of the multi selector to start or resume playback W to pause and SZ lt or P to rewind or advance M 63 pause AS to rewind or advance one frame at a time The amp and 9 buttons control volume With the movie paused on the desired frame press A to delete all frames before Choose start point or after Choose end point the selected frame Starting and ending frames are shown by P and icons 5 save the copy Select Yes and press to save the edited copy If necessary the copy can be trimmed as described above to remove additional footage Edited copies are indicated by a J icon in full frame playback vV Editing Movies Movies must be at least two seconds long The current position will be displayed in red if creating a copy at the current play
117. age 4 207 HE File Information Jl 3 4 5 Tal i 100D300S DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 04 2009 10 15 29 4288x2848 11 10 9 8 1 Protect status 2 Retouch indicator JE Focus point 4 AF area brackets o ssssssssssssssseeees 5 Frame number total number of frames JJ File name eecesnesnennenennenennenes Image quality EJ mage size PE Image authentication eee 308 EJ Time of recording E Date of recording M E Current card Slot essence f Folder name ss sssssssss sstssstsssssstsssre 1 Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Display mode M 247 2 If photograph was taken in focus mode S display shows point where focus first locked In focus mode focus point is only displayed if single point or dynamic area was selected for AF area mode and camera was able to focus 208 BE Highlights 1 2 3 4 1 Protect status secssssccssccsssecssesssseeeees 219 7 2 Retouch indicators 315 FE mage highlights 4 Folder number frame number 256 H Current channel 2 6 Highlight display indicator 1 Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode M 247 2 Blinking areas indicate highlights areas that may be overexposed for current channel Press lt or gt lt button while pressing button to cycle through channels f as follows RGB R G B all channels red green
118. age quality Image review WMA QS SZE Incandescent White balance 134 Index print 236 In focus indicator Information sescsseescsseeccssseccsseeees Information display Interval timer SHOOTING ssteceeee 270 i E EAE EAEN 170 171 285 i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR JPEG compression JPEG fine LCD brightness LCD illumination Lens distance information Lens focus ring Lens mount Lens mounting index Lens VR switch Local area network Lock mirror up for cleaning LONG exp NR eeeseecssecenees Lossless compressed Type es 53 74 83 111 Magenta Manage Picture Control Manual ssscsssssssssescsssecsseee 53 74 83 111 Manual Exposure mode s 111 Manual Flash cntrl for built in flash 284 Manual focus 53 74 83 Matrix Matrix metering Max continuous release Maximum aperture Maximum sensitivity MB D10 0 269 279 280 307 352 MB D10 battery type Memory buffer 43 86 89 90 Memory card sssesscscssseeseeeee 31 301 393 Memory card capacity 394 Metering 102 Metering selector 41 103 Microphone 5 58 62 Minimum aperture 27 104 Minimum shutter speed Mired Mirror Mirror up Mirror up mode Modeling flash MONiItor eeeeseeeeeneee Monitor cover Monitor off delay Monitor pre flash Mon
119. alog will be displayed highlight Yes and press 8 222 Connections Connecting to External Devices This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer how to print pictures and how to view them on a television set Connecting to a COMPUTEL sessssssosesesesessososeseseososesesesesessse 224 DSE ETNEA Ae O 225 Wireless and Ethernet Networks ssssssssssssessssssecsseseseesssssseesssseeeesssee 227 Printing Photograph SA eea 228 EINNA A a A O AA 229 Printing Pictures ONS at a NE o E 230 Printing Multiple Pictures serno Aa AAR 233 Creating a DPOF Print Order Print Set s esssssssssessesessssssssseesese 237 Viewing Photographs on TV sessssssssoscssoscssoscsscscoscsscscseosee 239 Standard Definition DeviCeS ssessssssssssesssssseeessssseessssssecessseeeessssesees 239 High Definition Devices seere a sueroa E EEN 241 223 Connecting to a Computer This section describes how to use the supplied UC E4 USB cable to connect the camera to a computer Before connecting the camera install Nikon Transfer and ViewNX from the supplied Software Suite CD see the Install Guide for more information Nikon Transfer starts automatically when the camera is connected and is used to copy photographs to the computer where they can be viewed using ViewNX Nikon Transfer can also be used to back up photographs and embed information in photographs as they are transferred while ViewNX can be use
120. an ii 319 Red Eye Correction sescsssssscsssssccssescessssecssseecesssecssneecesnseeesaee 320 Miehen 321 Monochrome 322 Filter Effects 322 Color Balas jap cesssayeacesiasescnsaiye a EN 323 Image OVELMAY cescssessdssasscctececancsssacsecacsissanavanseasscdetueveansoseconseetens 324 NEF RAW Processing ssssssssscsecsseecssescseeecssecsseeessecsseeessees 327 RESIZE nin ENE R N E RR 329 Side by Side COmMparison ssssssessessssssreesssssrsessssseresssseeeessssee 331 i My Menu Creating a Custom Menu ssssssssssssssrssssssssssseseresees 333 xvi Technical Notes 339 Compatible Lenses escsessssssecsssecsssessesecssccesseccsseessseessscessscessseessees Optional Flash Units Speedlights sscsssecssseccsseccseeccseecesees The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS Other ACCESSO ES ssicsccisscccssscssssssnsdssssiccnsccssstansatasaesbbeccesbeccsensateasbuces Caring for the Camera ssesssssscssssscsssesecsseecsssssesssesscnsesesnseessnsess StOFaGe eescseeeseee Cleaning seeeeceeeee The Low Pass Filter Clean NOW sussurri Clean at Startup Shutdown ssssssssssssssseesssesssseesssressseesssse Manual Clearning sssesccsssscsssesscsssecsssseccssecsssesecssssessentecseneees Caring for the Camera and Battery CaUtions esses D fa lts sesccsesicssseccsdscsassecascecaibeCessscsscdeiietebsesosdedesasbossacesscbebecnastacayseraasedes Exposure Progra cisscicesssscccssassesnsesastcoesebusto
121. and a E4 P icon will be displayed in the control panel Bee Pi T and viewfinder after you release the F4 button The current value for exposure compensation can be confirmed in the exposure indicator by pressing the E4 button Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 0 Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off Using a Flash When a flash is used exposure compensation affects both background exposure and flash level See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure compensation see Custom Setting b3 Exp comp fine tune m 270 For information on making adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the E4 button see Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation 0 271 For information on automatically varying exposure white balance or Active D Lighting see page 120 119 Bracketing Bracketing automatically varies exposure flash level Active D Lighting ADL or white balance slightly with each shot bracketing the current value Choose in situations in which it is difficult to set exposure Active D Lighting or white balance and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot or to experiment with different settings for the same subject BE Exposure and Flash Bracketing To vary exposure and or flash level over a series of photographs bn 1 Sel
122. and dial if On is selected for Change main sub If Aperture ring is selected aperture can only be adjusted with the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will show aperture in increments of 1 EV aperture for type G lenses is still set using the sub command dial Live view is not available when Aperture ring is selected and a CPU lens with an aperture ring is attached Note that regardless of the setting chosen the aperture ring must be used to adjust aperture when a non CPU lens is attached 297 Option Description If Off is selected the multi selector is used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback highlight thumbnails and navigate menus If On is selected the main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback move the cursor left or right during Menus thumbnail playback and move the menu highlight bar up or and down The sub command dial is used to display additional playback photo information in full frame playback and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail playback While menus are displayed rotating the sub command dial right displays the sub menu for the selected option while rotating it left displays the previous menu To make a selection press the center of the multi selector or 298 f9 Release Button to Use Dial MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made
123. any pictures selected for preset manual Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner digital camera or other device may be punishable by law Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced Do not copy or reproduce paper money coins securities government bonds or local government bonds even if such copies or reproductions are stamped Sample The copying or reproduction of paper money coins or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained the copying or reproduction of unused postage stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited Cautions on certain copies and reproductions The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private companies shares bills checks gift certificates etc commuter passes or coupon tickets except when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company Also do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government licenses issued by public agencies and private gro
124. aphs taken at high ISO sensitivities and additional time is required to record images The Brightness and Contrast Picture Control settings Q 157 can not be adjusted while active D Lighting is in effect M Active D Lighting versus D Lighting The Active D Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range while the D Lighting option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after shooting See Also When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 Auto bracketing set M 289 the camera varies Active D Lighting over a series of shots See page 129 for more information 165 Color Space The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction Choose a color space according to how photographs will be processed on leaving the camera Option Description Choose for photographs that will be printed or aa SRGB used as is with no further modification This color space is capable of expressing a wider gamut of colors than sRGB making it the preferred choice for images that will be extensively processed or retouched Adobe Adobe RGB 1 Select Color space MENU button i Y SHOOTING MENU To display the menus a press the MENU button S b i i i Set Picture Control Highlight Color space in I Manaia Picture Control the shooting menu and EEL i Active D Lighting press gt
125. aphs Print multiple Create index prints one at a time M 230 photographs 4 233 CO 236 v Disconnect USB cable m Selecting Photographs for Printing Images created at image quality settings of NEF RAW or TIFF RGB 68 can not be selected for printing JPEG copies of NEF RAW images can be created using the NEF RAW processing option in the retouch menu 327 Printing Via Direct USB Connection Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection set Color space to sRGB M 166 See Also See page 384 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing Connecting the Printer Connect the camera using the supplied UC E4 USB cable 1 Turn the camera off 2 Connect the USB cable Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle A USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the printer do not connect the cable via a USB hub 3 Turn the camera on A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor followed by a PictBridge playback display 6 PictBridge 229 Printing Pictures One at a Time 1 Selecta picture Press lt or P to view additional pictures Press A or W
126. apter EH 5a or EH 5 00e 352 H Flash sync terminal cover 347 USB CONNECHOF veesssssssssssseeees 225 229 4 Ten pin remote terminal fH Lens release button sesssnesnen 27 COVED seisccsssssosscotnessersosoonicsessees 198 356 g Focus mode selector 74 83 Flash sync terminal 347 Meter coupling lever sesssssssessseee 387 F Ten pin remote terminal 198 356 e PURO acesccsinsctceaniaivnoe 93 361 9 Connector cover 225 229 239 241 AF assist illuminator c00 268 Self timer lamp Red eye reduction lamp 175 JE Sub command dial sssssseee 297 Depth of field preview button eeesssesssssesssseccssneecssses 105 296 4 Fn button 121 125 129 179 292 JH Battery chamber cover 24 _ A we 12 lt lt 6 Battery chamber cover latch 24 Contact cover for optional MB D10 battery pack ceesccssssesssecsseeseeeee 352 CPU contacts BE Mounting index eee 27 g LEMS MOUN te cceesesecccsccssseesescesceeeee 27 84 J Tripod socket 12 BF 1A body cap wsscsssssssccsecsee 26 355 M The Microphone and Speaker recorded with the camera Do not place the microphone or speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices Failure to observe this precaution could affect audio data Camera Body Continued Nikon
127. are to avoid burns Continued operation could result in injury After removing the battery take the equipment to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection Do not disassemble Touching the product s internal parts could result in injury In the event of malfunction the product should be repaired only by a qualified technician Should the product break open as the result of a fall or other accident remove the battery and or AC adapter and then take the product toa Nikon authorized service center for inspection A Do not use in the presence of flammable gas Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of flammable gas as this could result in explosion or fire Keep out of reach of children Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury Do not place the strap around the neck of an infant or child Placing the camera strap around the neck of an infant or child could result in strangulation Observe proper precautions when handling batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries for use in this product Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment Do not short or disassemble the battery Be sure the product is off before replacing the battery If you are using an AC adapter be sure it is unplugged Do not attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards Do not expose the battery to flame or to
128. are using an optional remote cord attach it to the camera If you are not using a remote cord choose On for Custom Setting d10 Exposure delay mode 1 278 to prevent blur when the camera shutter release button is pressed Long Time Exposures Nikon recommends using a fully charged EN EL3e battery or an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter to prevent loss of power while the shutter is open Note that noise and distortion may be present in long exposures before shooting choose On for the Long exp NR option in the shooting menu 258 2 Select exposure MODE button mode Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until M is displayed in the viewfinder and control Main command dial panel 3 Choose a shutter speed While the exposure meters are active rotate the main command dial until hu ti appears in the shutter speed displays The exposure indicators do not appear when roti is selected 4 Press the shutter release button all the way down Press the shutter release button on the camera or remote cord all the way down The shutter will remain open while the shutter release button is pressed 5 Release the shutter release button Remove your finger from the shutter release button to record the photograph N Shutter speed 35 s aperture f 25 115 116 Autoexposure AE Lock Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after met
129. area2 Camera meters circle 3 mm 0 12 in in diameter approximately 2 of frame Circle is centered on current 5 r J focus point making it possible to E CJ meter off center subjects if non CPU Spot lens is used or if Auto area AF is in Spot metering effect M 76 camera will meter 5 area center focus point Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed even when background is much brighter or darker 1 For improved precision with non CPU lenses specify lens focal length and maximum aperture in Non CPU lens data menu M 196 2 Metered area is not actually displayed in viewfinder 102 To choose a metering method Metering selector rotate the metering selector until the desired mode is displayed ol Matrix Metering The metering method used is determined by the type of lens attached Type Gand D lenses Range information is included when determining exposure 3D color matrix metering Il Other CPU lenses Range information is not included when determining exposure color matrix metering Il Non CPU lenses Color matrix metering is available if focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non CPU lens data item in setup menu see page 196 center weighted metering is used if focal length or aperture is not specified See Also For information on choosing the size of the area assigned the greatest weight in center w
130. as been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on Exposure Bracketing The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture programmed auto aperture shutter priority auto or shutter speed aperture priority auto manual exposure mode If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt ISO sensitivity auto control in modes F 5 and A the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded Custom Setting e6 Auto bracketing mode M 290 can be used to change how the camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in manual exposure mode Bracketing can be performed by varying flash level together with shutter speed and or aperture or by varying flash level alone EE White Balance Bracketing The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph each with a different white balance For more information on white balance see page 133 T Select white balance bracketing Auto bracketing set Choose WB bracketing for Custom E Eat Setting e5 Auto bracketing set E s Flashoniy M We WB bracketing OD wi ADL bracketing 2 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the Fn button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in
131. ay contain a few pixels that are always lit or that do not light This is common to all TFT LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction Images recorded with the product are unaffected Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light Do not apply pressure to the monitor as this could cause damage or malfunction Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth Replace the monitor cover when transporting the camera or leaving it unattended Batteries Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from functioning and should be removed with a soft dry cloth before use Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries Turn the product off before replacing the battery The battery may become hot when used for extended periods Observe due caution when handling the battery Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat After removing the battery from the camera be sure to replace the terminal cover Charge the battery before use When taking photographs on important occasions ready a spare EN EL3e battery and keep it full
132. ay negative values on the left and positive values on the right 299 T The Setup Menu Camera Setup To display the setup menu press MENU and select the setup menu tab MENU button ETUP MENU ime rene and date E Languose Option jaa Option m Format memory card 301 Battery info 307 LCD brightness 301 Wireless transmitter 227 Clean image sensor 358 Image authentication 308 Lock mirror up for cleaning 361 Copyright information 309 Video mode 301 Save load settings 310 HDMI 302 GPS 201 Time zone and date 302 Virtual horizon 311 Language 303 Non CPU lens data 196 Image comment 303 AF fine tune 312 Auto image rotation 304 Eye Fi upload 313 Image Dust Off ref photo 305 Firmware version 314 1 Not available when battery is low 2 Only available when compatible Eye Fi memory card is inserted M 313 300 Format Memory Card MENU button gt Setup menu To begin formatting choose a memory card SEED slot and select Yes Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card in the selected slot Before formatting be sure to make backup copies as required LICE CF card slot gt OW SD card slot t 5 L2 m During Formatting Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting Two Button Format Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the s tt and MODE buttons for more than two sec
133. back position would result in a movie less than two seconds long The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the memory card To prevent the camera from turning off unexpectedly use a fully charged battery when editing movies The Retouch Menu RETOUCH MENU Movies can also be edited from the retouch g Monochrome menu C2 315 w Filter effects Color balance image overlay fE NEF RAW processing Resize 66 Image Recording Options This section describes how to choose image quality and size aE EOE A A A A seas 68 ImageSize aeaee AE AE AEEA SESS 71 Using Two Memory Cards sssssrsssssssscresssssssssessssesseseeseseess 72 67 68 Image Quality The D300S supports the following image quality options See page 394 for information on the number of pictures that can be stored at different image quality and size settings Option File type Description RAW data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory card in Nikon Electronic NEF RAW NEF Format NEF Use with images that will be transferred to a computer for printing or processing Record uncompressed TIFF RGB images at a bit TIFF depth of 8 bits per channel 24 bit color TIFF is se RGB supported by a wide variety of imaging applications JPEG fine Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 4 fine image quality Record JPEG images at a compression rat
134. battery chamber cover Unlatch and open the battery chamber cover 3 Insert the battery Insert the battery as shown at right 4 Close the battery chamber cover 24 M The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xviii xx and 364 367 of this manual To prevent short circuits replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 40 C 104 F Charge indoors at ambient temperatures in the vicinity of 5 35 C 41 95 F for best results charge the battery at temperatures above 20 C 68 F Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at which it was charged If the battery is charged at a temperature below 5 C 41 F the battery life indicator in the Battery info 1 307 display may show a temporary decrease The battery may be hot immediately after use Wait for the battery to cool before recharging Use the charger with compatible batteries only Unplug when not in use m Incompatible Batteries The D300S can not be used with EN EL3 or EN EL3a rechargeable Li ion batteries for the D100 D70 series or D50 or with the MS D70 CR2 battery holder EN EL3e Rechargeable Li ion Batteries The supplied EN EL3e shares information with compatible devices enabling the camera to show
135. battery charge state in six levels 37 The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge battery life and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last charged M 307 25 Attach a Lens Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is removed An AF S DX VR Zoom Nikkor 18 200 mm f 3 5 5 6G IF ED lens is used in this manual for illustrative purposes Mounting index CA a E 6 A Focal length Focal length index scale z Focus mode switch 27 83 Lens cap CPU contacts GQ 340 Rear lens cap a A VR mode switch g Focus ring M 83 1 Turn the camera off 2 Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap 26 3 Attach the lens Keeping the mounting index on the lens aligned with the mounting index on the camera body position the lens in the camera s bayonet mount Being careful not to press the lens release button rotate the lens counter clockwise until it clicks into place If the lens is equipped with an A M or M A M switch select A autofocus or M A autofocus with manual priority EE Detaching the Lens Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses To remove the lens press and hold the lens release button O while turning the lens clockwise After removing the lens replace the lens caps and camera body cap CPU
136. changing the roles of the main and sub command dials see Custom Setting f8 Customize command dials gt Change main sub 2 297 105 FP Programmed Auto In this mode the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture according to a built in program to ensure optimal exposure in most situations This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture To take photographs in programmed auto 1 Select exposure mode F MODE button Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until P is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel Shutter speed 1 320 s aperture 9 106 Flexible Program In exposure mode F different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by lhe rotating the main command dial while the exposure meters are on flexible program e Rotate the command dial to the right for large aS 5 ic apertures small f numbers that blur background details or fast shutter speeds that freeze motion Rotate the command dial to the left for small apertures large f numbers that increase depth of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion All combinations produce the same exposure While flexible program is in effect an asterisk appears in the control panel To restore default shutter speed and aperture sett
137. ct while focus lock is in effect If the subject moves focus again at the new distance See Also For information on choosing the role played by the AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f7 Assign AE L AF L button 296 81 Getting Good Results with Autofocus Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions or the in focus indicator may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep allowing the shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus In these cases use manual focus M 83 or use focus lock M 80 to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph There is little or no contrast between the subject and the background Example subject is the same color as the background The focus point contains objects at different distances from the camera Example subject is inside a cage The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns Example a row of windows in a skyscraper The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness Example subject is half in the shade Background objects appear larger than the subject Example a building is in the frame behind the subject The subject contains many fine details Exampl
138. curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain poke it with cleaning tools or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower These actions could scratch deform or tear the curtain Storage To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area If the product will not be used for an extended period remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant Do not however store the camera case ina plastic bag as this may cause the material to deteriorate Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals To prevent mold or mildew take the camera out of storage at least once a month Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away Store the battery in a cool dry place Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery away Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source Do not unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry To prevent an accidental interruption of power avoid carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected Notes on the monitor The monitor m
139. cus will take longer than normal phase detection autofocus In the following situations the camera may be unable to focus using contrast detect autofocus The camera is not mounted on a tripod The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame The subject lacks contrast e The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in brightness Across star filter or other special filter is used e The subject appears smaller than the focus point The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns e g windows in a skyscraper The subject is moving Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus Use an AF S lens The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or teleconverters Remote Cords If the shutter release button on a remote cord available separately see 1 356 is pressed halfway for over a second in tripod mode it will activate contrast detect autofocus If the remote cord shutter release button is pressed all the way down without focusing focus will not be adjusted before the picture is taken 51 Hand Held Mode A 1 Choose Hand held MENU button for Live view mode E E Live view mode To display the menus press the MENU button Highlight Hand held in the Live view mode menu and p
140. d 108 111 109 111 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on EJ Image quality eussnennsnssns PB image Size eeeesmtenemnenenemennenne E Image authentication indicator a7 J Time of recording nesmmsnennenennenes 28 27 18 EZ Date of recording 26 19 B Current card slot 26 Folder number White balance Color temperature White balance fine tuning Preset manual BBY Color space nniemennenenneneanennens Picture Control ssssssssssssssssssssssssssee E Active D Lighting g File name is displayed if photo was taken using optional Picture Control M 155 that is no longer stored in camera 215 Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback To display images in contact sheets of four nine or 72 images press the amp button Full frame playback Thumbnail playback The following operations can be performed To Use Description Display more qm Press 9E button to increase number of images images displayed Press amp button to reduce number of Display fewer Q images displayed When four images images are displayed press to view highlighted image full frame Press center of multi selector to switch E Toggle full frame COA back and forth between full frame and playback ony z thumbnail playback T Use multi selector to highlight images vad Highlight imag
141. d press gt note that this option is not available at battery levels of 24 or below 3 Press 6 E Lock mirror up for cleaning The message shown at right will be r LE When shutter button is pressed displayed in the monitor and a row of va a Pa To lower mirror turn camera off dashes will appear in the control panel and viewfinder To restore normal operation without inspecting the low pass filter turn the camera off 4 Raise the mirror Press the shutter release button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open revealing the low pass filter The display in the viewfinder will turn off and the row of dashes in the control panel will blink 5 Examine the low pass filter Holding the camera so that light falls on the low pass filter examine the filter for dust or lint If no foreign objects are present proceed to Step 7 6 Clean the filter Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a blower Do not use a blower brush as the bristles could damage the filter Dirt that can not be removed witha blower can only be removed by Nikon authorized service personnel Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter 7 Turn the camera off The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close Replace the lens or body cap M Use a Reliable Power Source The shutter curtain
142. d to sort photographs convert images to different file formats process NEF RAW photographs and modify NEF RAW TIFF and JPEG images To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted be sure the camera battery is fully charged If in doubt charge the battery before use or use an EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter available separately HE Supported Operating Systems The supplied software can be used with computers running the following operating systems Windows Windows Vista Service Pack 1 32 bit Home Basic Home Premium Business Enterprise Ultimate and Windows XP Service Pack 3 Home Edition Professional Macintosh Mac OS X version 10 3 9 10 4 11 or 10 5 6 See the websites listed on page xxiv for the latest information on supported operating systems m Connecting Cables Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle Camera Control Pro 2 Camera Control Pro 2 available separately 0 355 can be used to control the camera from a computer When Camera Control Pro 2 is running F will be displayed and the exposure indicator will blink in the control panel 224 Direct USB Connection Connect the camera using the supplied UC E4 USB cable 1 Turn the camera off 2 Turnthe computer on Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up 3 Connect the USB cable Connect the USB cable as shown
143. darker Exposure compensation 118 How do I make a time exposure Long time exposures 114 Can I vary exposure or flash level Exposure and flash 120 automatically over a series of photos bracketing 289 Can I create multiple copies of a photo White balance 125 using different white balance settings bracketing 289 Can vary Active D Lighting 129 automatically over a series of photos ADL bracketing 289 How do l adjust white balance White balance 133 Can I take pictures with a flash How can I reduce red eye Flash photography flash 171 mode red eye reduction 175 How can l record multiple shots asa single photograph Multiple exposure 184 Can pick the standard exposure level Fine tune optimal exposure 272 How can I reduce blur Exposure delaymode 278 Can the flash be used at shutter speeds faster than 1 250 s Flash sync speed 281 EE Viewing Photographs Question Key phrase m Can I view my photographs on the camera Camera playback 204 Can I view more information about photos Photo info 207 Why do parts of my photos blink 209 Photo info highlights 247 vii Question Key phrase m How do I get rid of an unwanted photo Deletingindividual 220 photos Can delete several photos at once Delete 221 Can zoom in on pictures Playback zoo
144. de image Display mode Copy image s Image review After delete E Rotate tall Highlight a menu item Press A or W to highlight a menu item a PLAYBACK MENU s Delete Playback folder Hide image Display mode Copy image s e A Image review e AA After delete El Rotate tall OFF Display options Press gt to display options for the selected menu item ee mage review Highlight an option Press A or W to highlight an option 8 select the highlighted item Press to select the highlighted item To exit without making a selection press the MENU button Playback folder w Hide image Display mode Copy image s e After delete Note the following points e Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available e While pressing or the center of the multi selector generally has the same effect as pressing there are some cases in which selection can only be made by pressing e To exit the menus and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway 44 Help If a 2 icon is displayed at the bottom left TS SHOOTING MENU corner of the monitor help can be displayed feit sys nii se by pressing the O n button Of Live view mode Lia Multiple exposure OFF A description of the currently selected option or menu will N Record the specified number of shots asf i w a single image I
145. des Flash mode Description Front curtain This mode is recommended for most situations In programmed auto and aperture priority auto modes shutter speed will automatically be set to values between 1 250 and 1 60 s 1 8 000 to 1 60 s when an optional sync flash unit is used with Auto FP High Speed Sync M 281 Red eye reduction lamp lights for approximately one second before main flash Pupils in subject s eyes contract reducing red eye effect sometimes caused by flash Owing to one second shutter release delay this Red eye Mode is not recommended with moving subjects or in reduction Other situations in which quick shutter response is required Avoid moving camera while red eye reduction lamp is lit Combines red eye reduction with slow sync Use for A SLOW portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery Available only in programmed auto and aperture Red eye priority auto exposure modes Use of a tripod is reduction with recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera slow sync chake Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s to capture both subject and background at night or under stows dim light This mode is only available in programmed auto and aperture priority auto exposure modes Use of Slow sync _ tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake ean REAR Rear curtain sync In shutter priority auto or manual expos
146. desired option is displayed in the control panel dial Control panel The Image Size Menu Image size can also be adjusted using the aaa ea Image size option in the shooting menu y Active folder File naming a 253 Primary slot selection Secondary slot function image quality 71 72 Using Two Memory Cards When two memory cards are inserted in the camera you can choose one as the primary card using the Primary slot selection item in the shooting menu Select CF card slot to designate the card in the CompactFlash card slot as the primary card SD card slot to choose the SD memory card The roles played by the primary and secondary cards can be chosen using the Secondary slot function option in the shooting menu Choose from Overflow the secondary card is used only when the primary card is full Backup each picture is recorded to both the primary and secondary card and RAW primary JPEG secondary as for Backup except that the NEF RAW copies of photos recorded at settings of NEF RAW JPEG are recorded only to the primary card and the JPEG copies only to the secondary card Backup and RAW Primary JPEG Secondary The camera shows the number of exposures remaining on the card with the least amount of memory Shutter release will be disabled when either card is full Focus Controlling How the Camera Focuses This section describes the options that
147. dial The color temperature is displayed in the control panel A X on SS Sub command dial Control panel M Choose Color Temperature selected value is appropriate The White Balance Menu Color temperature can also be selected in the white balance menu Note that the color temperature with the WB button and the sub command dial replaces the value selected in the white balance menu Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting Choose 4 Flash or Fluorescent for these sources With other light sources take a test shot to determine if the _ E PEG com p NEF RAW recording Set Picture Control Manage Picture Control Color space Active D Lishting El Long exp NR g AUTO S sRGB OFF OFF 141 Preset Manual Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast Two methods are available for setting preset white balance Method Description Neutral gray or white object is placed under Direct measurement _ lighting that will be used in final photograph and white balance is measured by camera M 144 Copy from existing White balance is copied from photo on memory photograph card CO 148 142 The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in pre
148. down to shoot Smoothly press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to take the picture While the photograph is being Access lamp recorded to the memory card the access lamp next to the card slot cover will light Do not eject the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out The Shutter Release Button The camera has a two stage shutter release button The camera focuses when the shutter release button is pressed halfway To take the photograph press the shutter release button the rest of the way down in H Focus Take photograph Viewing Photographs 1 Press the D button gt button A photograph will be displayed in the monitor The memory card containing the picture currently displayed is shown by an icon 2 View additional pictures Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing lt or P To view additional information on the current photograph press A and W m 207 MGAUTO 0 0 sR amp ESD AUTO 100D300S _DSC_0001 JPG 15 04 2009 10 15 29 To end playback and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway NORMAL 4288x2848 Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu 251 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s after shooting See Also See page 217 for information on choosi
149. e choose an option from the list above or use preset white balance White balance can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel Control panel Main command dial The White Balance Menu White balance can also be adjusted using the SHOOTING MENU i j i j JPEG compression White balance option in the shooting menu er ZO 253 Ls Set Picture Control Manage Picture Control Color space Active D Lighting El Long exo NR am Fluorescent Selecting fluorescent with the WB button and main command dial selects the type of bulb chosen for the Fluorescent option in the white balance menu M 253 Studio Flash Lighting Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units Use preset white balance or set white balance to Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance See Also When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 Auto bracketing set M 289 the camera will create several images each time the shutter is released White balance will be varied with each image bracketing the value currently selected for white balance See page 120 for more information 135 Color Temperature The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source
150. e Center weighted ecscseeee Center weighted area Center weighted metering 102 272 CF card SlOt cscccsesscsssesssesscsscesneasses 31 62 72 CF card slot Primary slot selection wie 72 Charging the battery s22 Choose color temp White balance 134 141 CL mode shooting speed sss 276 Clean image Sensor sssssssssssssssssssssssse 358 CIDE ienis 29 302 Clock battery Cloudy White balance CLS ss CLS compatible flash units Color balance COONS PACE iis ccatssasitacoveise sects astdettetesievtes Color temperature Commander mode CompactFlash CompactFlash card slot oe 31 Compatible lenses Compressed Type COMPUTER ssscsssssssstasscssisssssissssassssteassccesees 224 Connector for external MICFOPNONE resesccscssseecesesetecsessseeeees 4 58 Continuous high speed 86 88 Continuous low speed 86 88 276 Continuous release mode 86 88 Continuous servo AF 74 81 263 264 Contrast detect sssssssssssssssssssssssssesresssese 50 Contrast detect autofocus 48 50 51 Control panel Copy image s Copyright Copyright information CPU IENS Aad Creative Lighting System Cropping PictBridge Setup menu Custom setting bank Custom Settings Customize command dials Cyanotype Monochrome D Date and time Date format Daylight saving time DCF Version 2 0 167 392 D
151. e a field of flowers or other subjects that are small or lack variation in brightness 82 Manual Focus Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus non AF NIKKOR lenses or when the autofocus does not produce the desired results M 82 AF S lenses Set the lens focus mode switch to M AF lenses Set the lens focus mode Focus mode selector switch if present and camera ls Y focus mode selector to M Ip vV AF Lenses A A Do not select focus mode S or C Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera Manual focus lenses Set the camera focus mode selector to M To focus manually adjust the lens focusing ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus Photographs can be taken at any time even when the image is not in focus 83 The Electronic Rangefinder If the lens has a maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster the viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus the focus point can be selected from any of the 51 focus points After positioning the subject in the selected focus point press the shutter release button halfway and rotate the lens focusing ring until the in focus indicator is displayed Note that with the subjects listed on page 82 the in focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subj
152. e BM 8 Monitor Cover sssccssssccsssssccssescessssscrssessesssecersseeeessseeersssees 16 Overview Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single lens reflex SLR digital camera Please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly to get the most from the camera and keep them where they will be read by all those who use the product M Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements THE USE OF NON NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY m Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon authorized service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional flash units should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced Camera Settings The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used Getting to Know the Camera Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays You ma
153. e Flash Ready Indicator When the flash fires at full power the flash indicator in the camera viewfinder will blink to warn that the resulting photograph may be underexposed Note that the flash ready indicators on optional flash units will not display this warning when 1 320 s Auto FP is selected e2 Flash Shutter Speed MENU button gt Custom Settings menu This option determines the slowest shutter Gay 02 Flash shutter speed speed available when using front or rear s Es curtain sync or red eye reduction in programmed auto or aperture priority auto PERAE exposure modes regardless of the setting chosen shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in shutter priority auto and manual exposure modes or at flash settings of slow sync slow rear curtain sync or red eye reduction with slow sync Options range from 1 60 s 1 60 s to 30 s 30s 282 e3 Flash Cntrl for Built in Flash mEn button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the flash mode for the built in flash Option Description TILs TTL Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions M Manual Choose the flash level M 284 The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open producing a strobe light effect 1 284 Commander Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling mode one or more remote optional flash units N 285 RPT Repeating flash Cy Flash Control Mode The flash contr
154. e a higher ISO 96 sensitivity In exposure mode p Subject too dark photo Usertiash ih he 5 Lower shutter 108 will be underexposed speed A Choose a larger 109 aperture smaller f number Eoi Change shutter speed butb buki selected in or select manual 108 111 blinks exposure mode 5 exposure mode Optional flash unit that Change flash mode 4 4 does not support i TTL setting on optional 350 blinks blinks flash control attached flash unit and set to TTL Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution m 5 If indicator blinks for 3s eee mt after flash fires photo 172 blinks underexposed adjust may be underexposed settings and try again v Memory insufficient to e Reduce quality or 68 71 FuLL Fut record further photos size rae blinks at current settings or e Delete photographs 220 blinks camera has run outof e Insert new memory 31 file or folder numbers card Release shutter If error E persists or appears tblinks Camera malfunction frequently consult Nikon authorized service representative The cF and T9 Icons These icons flash to show the card affected Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution m No memor Camera cannot Turn camera off and zard Y E detect memory confirm that card is 31 card correctly inserted e Error accessing e Use Nikon 393
155. e dark After the power switch is released the illuminators will remain lit for six seconds while the exposure meters are active or until the shutter is released or the power switch is rotated toward 8 again Auto Meter Off T7 The shutter speed and aperture displays in the control panel and viewfinder will turn off if no operations are performed for about six seconds auto meter off reducing the drain on the battery Press the shutter release button halfway to reactivate the display in the viewfinder M 44 gt mml io A CE D CHEREE Exposure meters on Exposure meters off Exposure meters on The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay m 273 Camera Off Display If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted the memory card icon and number of exposures remaining will be displayed some memory cards may in rare cases only display this information when the Control panel camera is on 39 40 Adjust Camera Settings This tutorial describes the basic steps involved in taking photos 1 Choose exposure mode F Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial to select exposure mode F The camera will automatically adjust shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure in most situations MODE button
156. e flash ready indicator 4 blinks for about three seconds after the photograph is taken the flash has fired at full output and the photograph may be underexposed Check the results in the monitor If the photograph is underexposed adjust settings and try again See Also See page 282 for information on 1 320 s Auto FP 172 Lowering the Built in Flash To save power when the flash is not in use press it gently downward until the latch clicks into place m The Built in Flash Use with lenses with focal lengths of 16 300 mm M 344 Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm 2 ft and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses If the flash fires in continuous release mode 1 88 only one picture will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for several consecutive shots The flash can be used again after a short pause See Also See page 178 for information on locking flash value FV for a metered subject before recomposing a photograph For information on choosing a flash sync speed see Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 281 For information on choosing the slowest shutter speed available when using the flash see Custom Setting e2 Flash shutter speed 11 282 For information on flash control and using the built in flash in commander m
157. e highlighted lt O photograph full frame press y and hold the amp button to view images in other locations press SH and select the desired card and folder as described on page 217 Press to select the highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step 327 328 3 Adjust NEF RAW processing settings Choose image quality CL 68 image size M 71 white balance M 134 exposure compensation M 118 a Picture Control M 154 note that the Picture Control grid can not be displayed and high ISO noise reduction M 259 and color space M 166 for the JPEG copy Note that white balance is not available with multiple exposures or pictures created with image overlay and that exposure compensation increments differ from those used in shooting mode NEF RAW processing Image quality NORM gt S Image quality Image size White balance Exposure compensation Picture Control High ISO noise reduction Color space a WCancel Zoom NOK Copy the photograph Highlight EXE and press to create a JPEG copy of the selected photograph To exit without copying the photograph press the MENU button Resize MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create small copies of selected photographs Resize can be used during full frame playback as described on page 316 If you select Resize in the retouch menu you can resize multiple photographs as described below 1 Choose a destination
158. e preview is displayed to save the overlay After an overlay is created the resulting image will be displayed full frame in the monitor vV Image Overlay Only NEF RAW photographs created with the D300S can be selected for image overlay Other images are not displayed in the selection screen Only NEF RAW photographs with the same bit depth can be combined The overlay has the same photo info including date of recording metering shutter speed aperture exposure mode exposure compensation focal length and image orientation and values for white balance and picture control as the photograph selected for Image 1 The current image comment is appended to the overlay when it is saved copyright information however is not copied Overlays saved in NEF RAW format use the compression selected for Type in the NEF RAW recording menu and have the same bit depth as the original images JPEG overlays are saved using size priority compression 326 NEF RAW Processing MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create JPEG copies of NEF RAW photographs 1 Select NEF RAW T processing By icone Y aa 5 Highlight NEF RAW BA inane owt inai a processing in the retouch os menu and press gt to display a ma Edit move picture selection dialog listing only NEF RAW images created with this camera 2 Selecta photograph Use the multi selector to highlight a photograph to wad view th
159. e reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without Nikon s prior written permission Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice Notices for Customers in the U S A e Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product e While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in these manuals is accurate and complete we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your area address provided separately Federal Communications Commission FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turn
160. e selection Before going on select or deselect individual images you 4 Deselect al P can mark all or all protected o eiia images in the folder for copying by choosing Select all images or Select protected images To mark only individually selected images for copying choose Deselect all before proceeding 6 Select additional images Highlight pictures and press the center of the multi selector to select or deselect to view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the amp button Selected images are marked with a v Press to proceed to Step 7 when your selection is complete 7 Choose Select destination ts Copy imanes folder Select source Cer Select image s 100 i H r a Highlight Select destination TD folder and press gt Copy image s 8 Select a destination folder To enter a folder number choose Select folder by number enter the number 256 and press If the folder with the selected number does not already exist a new folder will be created DSet 249 250 To choose from a list of existing folders FREER choose Select folder from list highlight iii a folder and press 10203005 103D300S 9 Copy the images Highlight Copy image s and Ta Covy imasels press gt lt Select source OCF Select image s 100 pas Select destination tolder 102 A confirmation dialog will be Ea Coo imasels displayed highlight Yes and s press Pr
161. e setup menu 302 241 242 Menu Guide This chapter describes the options available in the camera menus The Playback Menu Managing Image 00 244 O The Shooting Menu Shooting Options ecsee 253 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings 260 The Setup Menu Camera Setup ccscssscscsssssssseeeeees 300 Ki The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copie 315 My Menu Creating a Custom Menu ccssccsseseeseees 333 243 gt The Playback Menu Managing Images To display the playback menu press MENU and select the PJ playback menu tab MENU button fie Y Duley mode MA Cooy imageds gt gio After delete Syo Cim Option m Delete 221 Playback folder 245 Hide image 245 Display mode 247 Copy image s 248 Image review 251 After delete 251 Rotate tall 251 Slide show 252 Print set DPOF 237 Playback Folder Choose a folder for playback MENU button gt gt playback menu Option Description D3005 during playback Pictures in all folders created with the D300S will be visible All Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback Current playback Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during Hide Image MENU button gt gt playback menu Hide or reveal selected pictures as describ
162. e shutter is released or the exposure meters release turn off Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed and sey AE lock s AE Re Hold remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off Ma AFlockonly Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed Flashoff The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn button is pressed If the Fn button is pressed while exposure or flash bracketing is active in single frame or quiet shutter release mode all shots in the current bracketing program will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed If white balance bracketing is Bracketing BKT burst active or continuous release mode mode CH or CL is selected the camera will repeat the bracketing burst while the shutter release button is held down in single frame release mode white balance bracketing will be repeated at the frame rate for CH release mode Matrix Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is metering pressed 293 Option Description center Center weighted metering is activated while the Fn weighted i A button is pressed metering o Spot Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is metering pressed Fn button performs same function as gt button Select when using a telephoto lens or in other circumstances in which it is difficult to operate the PI button with your left hand gt Playback Accesstop Pre
163. ecording begins use manual focus to focus during recording 83 note that in hand held mode recording will end if the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the AF 0N button is pressed 59 60 5 End recording Press the center of the multi selector again to end recording to end recording and take a still picture in live view press the shutter release button all the way down Recording will end automatically when the maximum size is reached or the memory card is full Maximum Size Individual movie files can be up to 2 GB in size The maximum length is 5 minutes for movies with a frame size of 1280 x 720 20 minutes for other movies note that depending on memory card write speed shooting may end before this length is reached See Also Frame size and microphone sensitivity can be selected in the Movie settings menu M 62 The behavior of the AE L AF L button can be adjusted using Custom Setting f7 Assign AE L AF L button 296 Adjusting Microphone Sensitivity Microphone sensitivity can be adjusted E without leaving live view Before pressing the center of the multi selector to start recording Di iN 5 k2x0mu 008 hold the button and press lt A microphone settings icon will be displayed in the monitor A Keep the gt button pressed and press A and P s 5h a to adjust microphone sensitivity vV Recording Movies Banding or distortion may
164. ect autofocus when Tripod is selected in live view mode M 49 Saved Value Only one value can be stored for each type of lens If a teleconverter is used separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and teleconverter Eye Fi Upload MENU button gt Y Setup menu This option is displayed only when an Eye Fi memory card available separately from third party suppliers is inserted in the camera Choose Enable to upload photographs to a preselected destination Note that pictures will not be uploaded if signal strength is insufficient Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose Disable where wireless devices are prohibited When an Eye Fi card is inserted its status is indicated by an icon in the information display 8 Eye Fi upload disabled Eye Fi upload enabled but no pictures a available for upload static Eye Fi upload enabled waiting to begin upload animated Eye Fi upload enabled uploading data a Error camera can not control Eye Fi card If a blinking Z HF appears in the control panel or viewfinder refer to page 382 if this indicator is not displayed pictures can be taken normally but you may be unable to change Eye Fi settings o 313 314 m Eye Fi Cards For information on errors involving Eye Fi cards see the manual provided with the Eye Fi card and direct any inquiries to the manufacturer The camera can be used to turn Eye
165. ect flash or MENU button exposure bracketing a Bracketinaflash Flash sync speed 1 250 7 r Flash shutt d 180 To display the menus 5 Flash ent for builtin fash TTLS press the MENU button e aaria w Select Custom Setting e5 peee Auto bracketing set in Ba it snitch the Custom Settings iy 05 Auto bracketing set menu highlight an A 4 i option and press ie a te Flashoni Choose AE amp flash to vary E o womens both exposure and flash m ADL bracketing L2 level AE only to vary only exposure or Flash only to vary only flash level 120 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the Fn button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the control panel ne Number of shots Fn button Main command dial Exposure and flash bracketing indicator At settings other than zero a Bai icon SIZ and exposure and flash bracketing PS SBP a ik indicator will be displayed in the control panel and a 4 icon will blink in the viewfinder and control panel See Also Changes to bracketing settings can be made using the Fn button the default setting see Custom Setting f5 Assign Fn button M 292 the depth of field preview button Custom setting f6 Assign preview button Q 296 or the AE L AF L button Custom Setting f7 Assign AE L AF L button M 296 Note that some button press opti
166. ect is not in focus confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting 84 Focal Plane Position To determine the distance between your subject and the camera measure from the focal plane mark e on the camera body The distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane is 46 5 mm 1 83 in Focal plane mark Release Mode Single Frame Continuous Quiet Shutter Release Self Timer or Mirror Up Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs one at a time with or without reduced camera noise in a continuous sequence with a timed shutter release delay or with the mirror raised to enhance shutter response and minimize vibration Choosing a Release MOde ssssssssscscsesssecscscsesesessssssesers 86 Oo Continuous Modenese sereoo osorscsecetcsctcsteccesstieces 88 Self hime Mode neneeese eese noenee natania tennit e eteesi St Eense Sresi ens 91 MirromUpiMOderrccrcscceccccssssecsessectscorescsettcscessecsececsevsesseesecteees 93 85 Choosing a Release Mode The camera supports the following release modes Mode Description S Camera takes one photograph each time shutter release Single frame button is pressed CL While shutter release button is held down camera records Continuous 1 7 frames per second Frame rate can be chosen using low speed Custom Setting d5 CL mode shooting speed 276 Ch While shutter release button
167. ed below Hidden pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be deleted by formatting the memory card image 7 Protected and Hidden Images Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the 1 Choose Select set Press the MENU button and select Hide image in the playback menu Highlight Select set and press to skip the remaining steps and reveal all pictures MENU button lt Zal ga Hide image a stlect set z Deselect all highlight Deselect all and press 245 246 2 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card to view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the amp button to view images in other locations press 9H and select the desired card and folder as described on page 217 and press the center of the multi selector to select the current picture Selected pictures are marked by a icon to deselect a picture highlight it and press the center of the multi selector 3 Press is Hide imaoe D Select set Press to complete the operation Display Mode MENU button gt playback menu Choose the information available in the playback photo information display M 207 1 Select options is Display mode Done Press A or W to highlight an Basic photo info Y option then press to select MEE Detailed photo info x amp Hig
168. ed for use with Nikon digital cameras For information on connecting the unit see the manual provided with the GP 1 198 BE Other GPS Units Optional Garmin GPS units that conform to version 2 01 or 3 01 of the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data format can be connected to the camera s ten pin remote terminal using an MC 35 GPS adapter cord available separately N 356 Operation has been confirmed with Garmin eTrex and Garmin geko series devices equipped with a PC interface cable connector These devices connect to the MC 35 using a cable with a D sub 9 pin connector provided by the manufacturer of the GPS device See the MC 35 instruction manual for details Before turning the camera on set the GPS device to NMEA mode 4800 baud 199 BE The GS Icon When the camera establishes p i25 oh communication with a GPS device a BB icon ne will be displayed in the control panel Photo AF Ja m information for pictures taken while the icon is displayed will include a page of GPS data M 214 GPS data are only recorded when the icon is displayed confirm that the amp icon is displayed in the control panel before shooting a flashing amp icon indicates that the GPS device is searching for a signal pictures taken while the amp icon is flashing will not include GPS data If no data are received from the GPS unit for two seconds the amp icon will clear from the display and the camera will stop recording GPS
169. efault settings 182 256 262 368 46 220 Delete all images s221 Delete current image 46 220 Depth of field sssssssssssssssssssssssssesrssssss 105 Depth of field preview DUTTON aiaa 105 289 296 Digital Print Order Format Diopter Diopter adjustment control 36 Direct sunlight White balance 134 Display mode 247 D Lighting 319 DPOF 228 233 237 392 Dust Off ref photo uu eeeesssssessseeesseeeeeee 305 Dynamic AF area Dynamic area AF Easy exposure compensation 271 399 400 Electronic rangefinder 84 340 342 Ethernet ccccccsccccsssssscscsssssssessessssees 227 352 EV steps for exposure cntrl ss 270 Exif version 2 21 srcsscoscsrsssnosasorceans 167 392 Exp comp fine tune Exposure 101 102 116 118 Exposure bracketing 120 289 290 Exposure Compensation sses 118 Exposure delay Mode 278 Exposure iNdiCator esssssesecccssseseeese 113 Exposure lock Exposure meters Exposure mode Exposure program External microphone ias Eye Fi upload s ssssssssssssssssssssssssssesrsssss F File information File naming File number sequence we 277 Filter CfFOCtS essssecsssssesssseecssseecsssecssseees 322 Filter effects Set Picture Control wu 157 158 Fine tune optimal exposure Firmware version FLASH ssssssctssssosescsssssesesses 171 175 177 178
170. efore the photograph is taken the self timer lamp will stop blinking and the beeping will become more rapid The shutter will be released about ten seconds after the timer starts Raising the built in flash interrupts the timer To restart wait until the flash ready indicator is displayed in the viewfinder and press the shutter release button halfway To turn the self timer off before a photograph is taken turn the release mode dial to another setting buli In self timer mode a shutter speed of tu bt amp is equivalent to approximately 1 10 s See Also For information on changing the timer duration see Custom Setting c3 Self timer Q 273 For information on setting a beep to sound during the timer count down see Custom Setting d1 Beep M 275 Mirror up Mode Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera movement when the mirror is raised Use of a tripod is recommended 1 Select mirror up mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Mup 2 Raise the mirror 4 Frame the picture focus and then press E the shutter release button the rest of the m way down to raise the mirror vV Using the Viewfinder Note that autofocus metering and framing can not be confirmed in the viewfinder while mirror is raised 3 Takea picture n Press the shutter release button all the C
171. eighted metering see Custom Setting b5 Center weighted area M 272 For information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method see Custom Setting b6 Fine tune optimal exposure 1 272 103 hd 104 Exposure Mode Exposure mode determines how the camera sets shutter speed and aperture when adjusting exposure Four modes are available programmed auto F shutter priority auto 5 aperture priority auto A and manual M Mode Description Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for Programmed f pe sey optimal exposure Recommended for snapshots i 106 and in other situations in which there is little time to adjust camera settings Shutter priority User chooses shutter speed camera selects 5 auto aperture for best results Use to freeze or blur CQO 108 motion User chooses aperture camera selects shutter Aperture BA speed for best results Use to blur background for A priority auto portraits or bring both foreground and Z 109 background into focus for landscape shots User controls both shutter speed and aperture Manual ye M Set shutter speed to ust hy for long time 4111 exposures Lens Types When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring 340 lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture highest f number Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring Non CPU lenses can only be used in exposure
172. eneecsseeeneeesnees 19 El o ETE E A E A 21 EESE o AA E A A E 22 Charge the Battery csecsssssscsssssssssseccsssscsssessssneeesssseccseesesnseesee 22 Insert the Battery cssccssseccssseccssesscsssscssssecesssseccsueeessseesssneessaeees 24 Attache LEMS iiisssseisssccsicsseconsesasisesnssscoopeonadestionassessuasisaspensasegedesanaaiens 26 BASIC Setinin corneei uenia 28 Insert a Memory Card ssesecsssseccssesscsssecsssseccseessssseccsseesssntecssseees 31 Format the Memory Card sssssssssccssseccssseccnseessseseecsseesesnteessneees 34 Adjust Viewfinder FOCUS ssssssssccsssseccsssescsseesssnsecsssseecsseessseseesse 36 Basic Photography and PlaybaCkK sssssssssssssssssssseesssssseesssseseessssssee 37 Turn the Camera On Adjust Camera Settings Ready the Camera ssesscssssccssssssssssssessssessssescnseesessseccsseessensecssneees FOCUS ANG SHOO scccseesesssiscsercccovesssrsssusesesennnusanscennsscoonensiassonnonsecnntoid Viewing Photographs sssscssssscccssscssseecssnseessseesesnsecssseseeesseesssess Deleting Unwanted Photographs ssccsssssscccssssesssennseeesees 46 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View 47 Framing Photographs in the MONitol csssecssseccsseccseecsseesesees 48 Recording and Viewing Movies Recording MOVIES ssscssssccssesecssseecssscecsssceesssseessseecssseeessseecenseeesnsees 58 Viewing MOV ES s decccccscscsscedessescsersesseisnisennsiseesshacobecddesbs
173. enerates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor damage data stored on the memory card or affect the product s internal circuitry Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an extended period Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in photographs Cleaning When cleaning the camera body use a blower to gently remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly In rare instances static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or go dark This does not indicate a malfunction and the display will soon return to normal The lens and mirror are easily damaged Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower When using an aerosol blower keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid To remove fingerprints and other stains from the lens apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully See The Low Pass Filter A 358 361 for information on cleaning the low pass filter Lens contacts Keep the lens contacts clean Do not touch the shutter curtain The shutter
174. ent background lighting If type G or D lens is used distance information is included when calculating flash output Precision of calculation can be increased for non CPU lenses by providing lens data focal length and maximum aperture see M 195 Not available when spot metering is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame to standard level brightness of background is not taken into account Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense of background details or when exposure compensation is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected 1 ISO Sensitivity i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 3200 At values over 3200 or under 200 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings Using the Built in Flash Follow these steps when using the built in flash 1 Choosea metering method Metering selector 1 102 Ses Select matrix or center weighted D COP metering to activate i TTL balanced fill JE flash for digital SLR Standard i TTL flash K for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected 2 Press the flash pop up button The built in flash will pop up and begin charging When the flash is fully charged the flash ready indicator 4 will light
175. er View photo Press A or to view information about information current photograph 2 207 View Qt See page 216 for more information on the thumbnails thumbnail display Zoom in on Q See page 218 for more information on photograph playback zoom 2 Confirmation dialog will be displayed Delete images T Press f again to delete photo Change To protect image or to remove protection protect O n from protected image press O n button status 219 Return to H Io Monitor will turn off Photographs can be shooting mode 2 D taken immediately Display menus MENU See page 243 for more information Retouch Create retouched copy of current picture photograph or movie Q 64 315 If current picture is marked with icon to 3 show that it is a movie pressing center of Play movie multi selector starts movie playback ZX 63 205 206 Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu 251 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s after shooting because the camera is already in the correct orientation images are not rotated automatically during image review In single frame quiet shutter release self timer and mirror up release modes photographs are displayed one at a time as they are taken In continuous release mode display begins when shooting ends with the first photograph in the current series displayed See Also For
176. er Format DPOF is an industry wide standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card Exif version 2 21 The camera supports Exif Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras version 2 21 a standard in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exif compliant printers PictBridge A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and printer industries allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI compliant devices via a single cable connection Approved Memory Cards The following cards have been tested and approved for use in the D300S Type 1 CompactFlash memory cards Extreme IV SDCFX4 2GB 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB sanpiske Extreme ll SDCFX3 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB anish Titra SDCFH 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB Standard SDB 1 GB 2GB 4 GB Professional UDMA 300 x 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB 233 x 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB 133 x 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 80x 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB 60x 4GB Lexar _ Professional Media Platinum II SD memory cards SanDisk 512 MB 1 GB 2 GBt 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB Toshiba 512 MB 1 GB
177. ering exposure 1 Select center weighted or Metering selector spot metering M 102 Matrix metering will not produce the desired results with autoexposure lock If using center weighted metering select the center focus point with the multi selector M 78 2 Lock exposure Shutter release ae ee button Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter release button halfway With the shutter release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned in the focus point press the AE L AF L button to lock exposure and focus except in manual focus mode Confirm that the in focus 2 indicator appears in the viewfinder AE L AF L button While exposure lock is in effect an AE L indicator will appear in the viewfinder 3 Recompose the photograph Keeping the AE L AF L button pressed recompose the photograph and shoot Metered Area In spot metering exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 3 mm 0 12 in circle centered on the selected focus point In center weighted metering exposure will be locked at the value metered in an 8 mm circle in the center of the viewfinder Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture While exposure lock is in effect the following settings can be changed without altering the metered value for exposure Exposure mode Setting P Shutter speed and aperture flex
178. ers Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large number of folders 257 File Naming MENU button gt O shooting menu Photographs are saved using file names consisting of DSC_ or in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space _DSC followed by a four digit number and a three letter extension e g DSC_0001 JPG The File naming option is used to select three letters to replace the DSC portion of the file name For information on editing file names see steps 2 and 3 of Renaming Shooting Menu Banks M 254 Note that the portion of the name that can be edited is a maximum of three characters long Extensions The following extensions are used NEF for NEF RAW images TIF for TIFF RGB images JPG for JPEG images AVI for movies and NDF for dust off reference data In each pair of photographs recorded at image quality settings of NEF RAW JPEG the NEF and JPEG images have the same file names but different extensions Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction MENU button gt O shooting menu Qo ly P web ar DAS 7T NN If On is selected photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 8 s will be processed to reduce noise The time required for processing is roughly equal to the current shutter speed during processing job ar will blink in the shutter speed aperture
179. es aO for full frame playback playback zoom y 2 218 or deletion 220 Delete highlighted photo T See page 220 for more information Change protect status of Om See page 219 for more information highlighted photo Return to H 1o Monitor will turn off Photographs can shooting mode be taken immediately Display menus MENU See page 243 for more information 216 Choosing a Memory Card If two memory cards are inserted you can select a memory card for playback by pressing the 9E Playback slot and folder button when 72 thumbnails are displayed The dialog shown at right will be displayed SD card slot highlight the desired memory card slot and press to display a list of folders then highlight Cancel a folder and press to view the pictures in the selected folder See Also For information on choosing the role played by the center of the multi selector see Custom Setting f2 Multi selector center button N 291 217 Taking a Closer Look Playback Zoom Press the amp button to zoom in on the current image The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect To Use Description Zoom in Q qE Press amp to zoom in to or out maximum of approximately 27 x large images 20 x medium images or 13 x small images Press 9E to View zoom out While photo is other zoomed in use
180. ess again to exit K Ejes when copying is complete st No vV Copying Images Images will not be copied if there is insufficient space on the destination card Be sure the battery is fully charged before copying movies If the destination folder contains an image with the same name as one of the images to be copied a Desana 5 7 7 already exists confirmation dialog will be displayed Replace existing image Select Replace existing image to replace the image with the image to sd be copied or select Replace all to replace all existing images with the same names without further prompting To continue without replacing the image select Skip or select Cancel to exit without copying any further images Protect status is copied with the images but print marking 237 is not Hidden images can not be copied Image Review MENU button gt gt playback menu Choose whether pictures are automatically PESEE displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting If Off is selected pictures can only be displayed by pressing the P button After Delete MENU button gt playback menu Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted Option Description Show Display following picture If deleted picture was last frame next previous picture will be displayed s Show Display previous picture If deleted picture was first frame
181. etouched using Capture NX 2 available separately M 355 or the clean image options available in some third party imaging applications m Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional flash units should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions Do not drop The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration Keep dry This product is not waterproof and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage Avoid sudden changes in temperature Sudden changes in temperature such as occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day can cause condensation inside the device To prevent condensation place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature Keep away from strong magnetic fields Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that g
182. etween the selected time zone and Coordinated Universal Time or UTC in hours and press 6 Turn daylight saving time EEE Daylight saving time on or Off Select Daylight saving time and press Daylight saving time is off by default if daylight saving time is in effect in the local time zone press A to highlight On and press 7 Set the date and time BB Time zone and date Select Date and time and pees press gt Press lt or P to select 200k E E an item A or W to change i mw O Press when the clock is set to set the current date and time 29 30 8 Set date format BB Time zone and date Date format Select Date format and press Y YWD Year Month Day gt Press A or W to choose the l E wovyMont Darte order in which the year month ox A Day Monte and day will be displayed and press 9 Exitto shooting mode Press the shutter release button halfway to exit to shooting mode he The Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by an independent rechargeable power source which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter 352 Two days of charging will power the clock for about three months If the icon flashes in the control panel the clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset Set the clock to the correct time and date
183. excessive heat Do not immerse in or expose to water Replace the terminal cover when transporting the battery Do not transport or store the battery with metal objects such as necklaces or hairpins Batteries are prone to leakage when fully discharged To avoid damage to the product be sure to remove the battery when no charge remains When the battery is not in use attach the terminal cover and store in a cool dry place The battery may be hot immediately after use or when the product has been used on battery power for an extended period Before removing the battery turn the camera off and allow the battery to cool Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the battery such as discoloration or deformation xix A Observe proper precautions when handling the quick charger Keep dry Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a dry cloth Continued use could result in fire Do not handle the power cable or go near the charger during thunderstorms Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock Do not damage modify or forcibly tug or bend the power cable Do not place it under heavy objects or expose it to heat or flame Should the insulation be damaged and the wires become exposed take the power cable to a Nikon authorized service representative for inspection Fail
184. f no operations are be displayed while the button pearance oona 0 is pressed Press A or W to SS E Aa scroll through the display O n button 21 First Steps Charge the Battery The D300S is powered by an EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery supplied To maximize shooting time charge the battery in the supplied MH 18a quick charger before use About two and a quarter hours are required to fully recharge the battery when no charge remains 1 1 Plug the charger in Insert the AC adapter plug into the battery charger and plug the power cable into an electrical outlet 2 Remove the terminal cover f Remove the terminal cover from the battery Terminal cover 22 3 Insert the battery Insert the battery into the charger The CHARGE lamp will blink while the battery charges n ton nn 0 0 EN EE a QUIC CHARGER MH 1 CHARGE mm O eno JIS Quic l CHARGER MH 38 CHARGE D Battery Charging charging complete 4 Remove the battery when charging is complete Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops blinking Remove the battery and unplug the charger 23 Insert the Battery 1 Turn the camera off Power switch vV Inserting and Removing Batteries Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries 2 Open the
185. fferences in vision Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before shooting 1 Turn the camera on Power switch im Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on 2 Focus the viewfinder Rotate the diopter control until the viewfinder display focus points and AF area brackets are in sharp focus When operating the diopter control with your eye to the viewfinder be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in your eye Focus point Adjusting Viewfinder Focus If you are unable to focus the viewfinder as described above rotate the AF area mode selector to single point AF and the focus mode selector to S then frame a high contrast subject in the center focus point and focus using autofocus With the camera in focus rotate the diopter control until the subject is clearly focused in the viewfinder If necessary viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using optional corrective lenses M 353 Basic Photography and Playback Turn the Camera On Before taking photographs turn the camera on and check the battery level and number of exposures remaining as described below 1 Turn the camera on Turn the camera on The control panel will turn on and the display in the viewfinder will light Power switch a 2 Check the battery level Check the battery level in the control panel or viewfinder
186. g c2 Auto meter off delay 273 Preset d 0 The new value for white balance will be stored in preset d 0 automatically replacing the previous value for this preset no confirmation dialog will be displayed A thumbnail will be displayed in the preset white balance list CO 147 To use the new value for white balance select preset d 0 if no value has been measured for white balance before d 0 is selected white balance will be set to a color temperature of 5 200 K the same as Direct sunlight The new white balance value will remain in preset d 0 until white balance is measured again By copying preset d 0 to one of the other presets before measuring a new value for white balance up to five white balance values can be stored Q 147 EE Copying White Balance from d 0 to Presets d 1 d 4 Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white balance from d 0 to any of the other presets d 1 d 4 1 Select PRE Preset manual Press the MENU button and select White balance in the shooting menu Highlight Preset manual and press gt MENU button fee White balance O Incandescent Fluorescent W Direct sunlight Es Flash amp Cloudy E e Shade EI Choose color temp LAGA Preset manual gt Select a destination Highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 and press the center of the multi selector E White PRE DSelet Set e balance Copy d 0 to t
187. g e5 set to AE amp flash HED Flashonly Flash bracketing is performed only with i TTL or AA flash control If a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not used ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot regardless of the setting selected for ISO sensitivity auto control 98 e7 Bracketing Order MENU button gt Custom Settings menu At the default setting of MTR gt under gt over NI exposure flash and white balance bracketing are performed in the order described on pages 122 and 126 If Under gt MTR gt over gt is selected shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing 290 f1 amp Switch MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose what happens when the power switch is rotated to 8 Option Description 8 LCD backlight amp Control panel backlight illuminates for 6 s Minto a display amp and information Control panel backlight illuminates and shooting information is displayed in monitor f2 Multi Selector Center Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu This option determines the role assigned to the center of the multi selector in shooting and playback modes regardless of the option selected pressing the center of the multi selector when a movie is displayed full frame starts movie playback BE Shooting Mode
188. ght Destination and press To record movies to the CompactFlash card highlight CF card iy Movie settings g Destination UEa CF card slot d 00h 19a 30s E CSD SD card slot 00h 09m 50s slot and press Select SD card slot to record movies to the SD memory card The menu shows the time available on each card recording ends automatically when no time remains Viewing Movies Movies are indicated by a icon in full frame playback 1204 Press the center of the multi selector to start playback R icon Length Current position total length Volume Guide The following operations can be performed To Use Description Pause V Pause playback Resume playback when movie is paused or Play during rewind advance While playback is in progress speed doubles l Rewind with each press from 2x to 4x to 8x to 16x advance lt gt keep pressed to skip to beginning or end of movie While playback is paused movie rewinds or advances one frame at a time keep pressed for continuous rewind or advance Adjust volume Q8 9Q Press amp to increase volume S to decrease Trim movie See page 64 for more information Resume Monitor turns off Photographs can be taken shooting g immediately Display menus MENU See page 243 for more information Exit A R Exit to full frame playback N icon N is displayed in full frame and movie playb
189. ght Multiple l cere o i exposure in the shooting E Interval timer shooting l menu and press gt 2 Select Number of shots BB Mutite exposure Le Highlight Number of shots P and press gt P Number of shots Auto gain 3 Select the number of shots BB Multiote exposure E Number of shots Press A or W to choose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph and press 68 4 select Auto gain T Done te Number of shots Highlight Auto gain and press gt 5 Set gain iy Multiple exposure Auto gain Highlight one of the following options and press Option Description Gain adjusted according to number of exposures On actually recorded gain for each exposure is set to 2 for 2 exposures 3 for 3 exposures etc Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure Recommended if background is dark Off 185 6 Select Done BUS a a Highlight Done and press A icon will be displayed in the sus Number of shots E Auto gain control panel To exit without taking a multiple exposure select Multiple exposure gt Reset in the shooting menu 186 Frame a photograph focus and shoot 4 In continuous high speed and continuous low ZN speed release modes M 86 the camera records all exposures in a single burst In other release modes one pho
190. graphs on computer monitor before select mode upload Control camera from computer using PC mode Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network Print mode computer For more information see the WT 4 user s manual Be sure to update to the latest versions of the WT 4 firmware and supplied software I Transfer Mode When Wireless transmitter gt Mode gt Transfer mode is selected in the camera setup menu the button is used during playback to select pictures for upload preventing it from being used to select pictures for other operations such as side by side comparison M 331 To restore normal operation select another option for Wireless transmitter gt Mode Movies The WT 4 can be used to upload movies in transfer mode if Auto send or Send folder is not selected for Transfer settings Movies can not be uploaded in thumbnail selector mode WT 4A B C D E The principal difference between the WT 4 and WT 4A B C D E is in the number of channels supported unless otherwise stated all references to the WT 4 also apply to the WT 4A B C D E 227 228 Printing Photographs To print selected JPEG pictures on a PictBridge printer via direct USB connection follow the steps below Take photographs Select photographs for printing using Print set DPOF M 237 Connect camera to printer M 229 Print photogr
191. gt button To exit to playback mode with the highlighted image displayed press rom E Source Retouched image copy m Side by Side Comparison The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that was protected M 219 is on a locked memory card has since been deleted or hidden M 245 or contains embedded image authentication information M 308 My Menu Creating a Custom Menu To display My Menu press MENU and select the My Menu tab MENU button SE 2U le The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized list of options from the playback shooting Custom Settings setup and retouch menus for quick access up to 20 items If desired recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu QQ 337 Options can be added deleted and reordered as described below Adding Options to My Menu 1 Select Add items MY MENU Image quality In My Menu highlight Add NEE ANO recs items and press gt t5Assign Fn button B Remove items Rank items El Choose tab 2 Select a menu E Add items Highlight the name of the Playback menu sn os gt Y menu containing the option M 2 Custom setting menu Setup menu you wish to add and press gt Wi Retouch menu 333 334 3 Select an item a Additems Shooting menu bank a S R h Highlight the desired menu n ELN File naming item and press
192. h copyright information to all Jes subsequent photographs Attach oar Copyright copyright information can be turned on g nas and off by highlighting it and pressing P Ma m Copyright Information To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring the camera to another person Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright information option 309 Save Load Settings MENU button gt Y Setup menu Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory card or to the memory card in the primary card slot if two memory cards are inserted if the memory card is full an error will be displayed M 381 Menu Option Display mode Image review After delete Rotate tall Shooting menu bank File naming Image quality Image size JPEG compression NEF RAW recording White balance with fine tuning and presets d 0 d 4 Playback shooting leet picture Control all banks Color space Active D Lighting Long exp NR High ISO NR ISO sensitivity settings Live view mode Movie settings Custom settings all banks All Custom Settings except Reset custom settings 310 Menu Option Clean image sensor Video
193. h of field preview button is pressed M 105 No modeling flash is emitted if Off is selected e5 Auto Bracketing Set MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing 120 is in effect Choose AE amp flash AE to perform both exposure and flash level bracketing AE only AE to bracket only exposure Flash only to perform only flash level bracketing WB bracketing WB to perform white balance bracketing 1 125 or ADL bracketing to perform bracketing using Active D Lighting 129 Note that white balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG 2 289 e6 Auto Bracketing Mode M MENU button gt Custom Settings menu This option determines which settings are affected when AE amp flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e5 in manual exposure mode Option Description Camera varies shutter speed Custom Setting e5 4 Flash speed set to AE only or shutter speed and flash level Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash Camera varies shutter speed and aperture Custom Flash speed Setting e5 set to AE only or shutter speed aperture aperture and flash level Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash Camera varies aperture Custom Setting e5 set to Flash aperture AE only or aperture and flash level Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash Camera varies flash level only Custom Settin
194. he chosen lens number This Move combination of focal length and aperture can be recalled at any time by selecting the lens number using camera controls as described below BE Choosing a Lens Number Using Camera Controls 1 Assign non CPU lens number selection to a camera control Select Choose non CPU lens number as the command dials option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu Non CPU lens number selection can be assigned to the Fn button Custom Setting f5 Assign Fn button M 292 the depth of field preview button Custom Setting f6 Assign preview button M 296 or the AE L AF L button Custom Setting f7 Assign AE L AF L button 1 296 Use the selected control to choose a lens number Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial until the desired lens number is displayed in the control panel Focal Maximum length aperture Ges an Main command dial Lens number 197 Using a GPS Unit A GPS unit can be connected to the ten pin remote terminal allowing the current latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC and heading to be recorded with each photograph taken The camera can be used with an optional GP 1 GPS unit see below note that the GP 1 does not provide the compass heading or with third party units connected via an optional MC 35 GPS adapter cord M 199 HE The GP 1 GPS Unit The GP 1 is an optional GPS unit design
195. he mirror makes when the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the AF 0N button is pressed can be mistaken for the sound of the shutter and that if single servo AF is used a photograph will only be recorded if the camera is able to focus m Shooting in Live View Mode Although they will not appear in the final picture banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or if an object moves at high speed through the frame Bright light sources may leave after images in the monitor when the camera is panned Bright spots may also appear When shooting in live view mode avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry Live view shooting ends automatically if the lens is removed Live view mode can be used for up to an hour Note however that when used in live view mode for extended periods the camera may become noticeably warm and its internal temperature may rise resulting in image noise and unusual colors To prevent damage to the camera s internal circuits live view shooting will end automatically before the camera overheats A count down display will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends At high ambient temperatures this display may appear immediately when live view mode is selected Enorm ALTO gas Bx20 005
196. he selected preset Highlight Copy d 0 and press If comment has been created for d 0 M 152 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset E White balance Preset manual a Set Edit comment Select image Copy H0 147 148 BE Copying White Balance from a Photograph d 1 d 4 Only Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an existing photograph to a selected preset d 1 d 4 only Existing white balance values can not be copied to preset d 0 1 Select PRE Preset manual Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu and press gt ee White balance O Incandescent i Fluorescent Direct sunlight Flash T a Cloudy E e Shade E3 Choose color temp K PRE Select a destination Highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 and press the center of the multi selector iy White balance ae iy Q ra d L2 PRE Selet Set e Choose Select image Highlight Select image and press E White balance E Preset manual 1 Set Edit comment Copy 0 4 Highlight a source image Highlight the source image To view the highlighted image full frame press and hold the amp button To view images in other locations press 91 and select the desired card and folder Q 217 Playback slot and folder SD card slot 5 Copy white balance Press the cente
197. he shutter release button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point 3D tracking When the shutter release button is pressed halfway the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera Consequently 3D tracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a very small area of the frame 265 a4 Focus Tracking with Lock On_ MEN button gt Custom Settings menu This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large changes in the distance to the subject Option Description AFE Long When the distance to the subject changes abruptly the _________ camera waits for the specified period long normal or AF Normal short before adjusting the distance to the subject This _ prevents the camera from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by objects passing through the frame The camera immediately adjusts focus when the distance to Off the subject changes Use when photographing a series of subjects at varying distances in quick succession a5 AF Activation MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If Shutter AF ON is selected both the BAF activation shutter release button and the AF 0N button r can be used to initiate autofocus If AF ON y only is selected autofocus is only initiated E AFONony when the AF ON button is pressed AF2 Short
198. he view through the lens as shown at right Recording and Viewing Movies This chapter describes how to record movies in live view Recording MOVIES Jucs ccecececseeccecsvcossenceseceesssncireresssescarsrsciaesenesees 58 VieWing MOVIES cc ccccesscocsscecsesessasececsctecsssecsacessacocsateneesesees 63 Editing MOVIES ccecsncssecevecessscvccsvcosssneesocstesencicersessescecsesetaereeesess 64 57 58 Recording Movies Movies can be recorded at 24 fps in live view mode Before recording choose a Picture Control M 154 and color space M 166 1 Choosea live view mode MENU button me Live view mode To display the menus press yn the MENU button Highlight an option in the Live view mode menu and press Tripod In modes A and M O18 movies are recorded at the aperture selected before live view starts M 109 111 the smallest aperture available with movies is f 16 Focus can be adjusted during shooting using contrast detect AF Hand held The camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture in response to changes in subject brightness Y a Handheld M EE Using an External Microphone Instead of the built in microphone commercially available external microphones can be used to avoid picking up sounds produced by the lens during focusing or vibration reduction Stereo recording is available with any microphone that has a stereo mini pin jack 3 5mm diameter Micr
199. hite balance mage was not created with D300S 1 148 4 375 376 White balance bracketing unavailable NEF RAW or NEF JPEG image quality option selected for image quality 168 e Multiple exposure mode is in effect N 187 Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image A auto is selected for sharpening contrast or saturation For consistent results over a series of photographs choose a setting other than A auto 158 Can not adjust Picture Control contrast or brightness Contrast and brightness can not be adjusted when Active D Lighting is on Turn Active D Lighting off Metering can not be changed Live view is in progress autoexposure lock is in effect or movie is being recorded CO 54 61 116 Exposure compensation can not be used Choose exposure mode F 5 or A 118 Only one shot taken each time shutter release button is pressed in continuous shooting mode Lower built in flash Q 173 Sound is not recorded with movies Microphone off is selected for Movie settings gt Microphone External microphone is disconnected during recording BE Playback Flashing areas shooting data or graphs appear on images Press A or W to choose photo information displayed or change settings for Display mode 207 247 NEF RAW image is not played back Photo was taken at image quality of NEF JPEG 2169 Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras Pictures recorded with other ma
200. hlight the option for the photo S RGB histogram A S amp Data information display AY a appears next to selected items to deselect highlight and press gt 2 Save changes and exit ma Diss To return to the playback menu Basic photo info highlight Done and press d Detailed photo info Highlights amp RGB histogram M Data 2 247 Copy Image s MENU button gt playback menu Copy images between memory cards This option is only available when two memory cards are inserted in the camera Option Description Select source Select the card from which pictures will be copied Select image s Select the pictures to be copied Select destination folder Select the folder to which pictures will be copied Copy image s Copy the images To copy images 1 Choose Select source ss Cov imants Highlight Select source and eters s press gt D pa Select image s g 2 Select the source card is Co imanels W Select source Highlight the slot containing the card from which images er eis will be copied and press 09050 cst 3 Choose Select image s ws 007 masels Highlight Select image s and j aoe press gt x g a 4 Select the source folder Tes Cony imanels W Select image s Highlight the folder containing the images to be copied and press P 248 5 Make the initial selection a Cory images T Default imag
201. hoose from the 51 focus points oan gogez AF51 51 points pomi geen oga nonn shown at right 0000 000 0000 000 000 000 Choose from the 11 focus points AF11 11 points shown at right Use for quick focus point selection D ooo 000 000 o 267 268 a9 Built in AF assist Illuminator env button gt Custom Settings menu Choose whether the built in AF assist illuminator lights to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor Option Description On The AF assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor AF assist illumination is only available when both of the following conditions are met 1 Single servo autofocus is selected for focus mode M 74 2 Auto area AF is chosen for AF area mode Q 76 or single point or dynamic area AF is chosen and the center focus point is selected Off The AF assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation The camera may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor The AF Assist Illuminator The AF assist illuminator has a range of about 0 5 3 0 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in when using the illuminator use a lens with a focal length of 24 200 mm and remove the lens hood See Also See page 345 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF assist a10 AF On for MB D10 MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the func
202. hting Pressing the Fn button rotate the sub command dial to choose Active D Lighting R ne gt MN Fn button Sub command dial Active D Lighting is shown in the control panel Control panel display Active D Lighting Egam Auto L Low mN Normal mH High H Extra high 130 4 Framea photograph focus and 7 shoot a The camera will vary Active D Lighting shot by shot according to the bracketing program selected While bracketing is in effect a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the control panel A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot 131 132 BE Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset M 182 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated ADL Bracketing In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken Shooting will resume the next time the shutter release button is pressed In other modes one shot will be taken each time the shutter release button i
203. htly dampened in distilled body water and dry thoroughly Important Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty These glass elements are easily damaged Remove dust and Lens lint with a blower If using an aerosol blower keep the can mirror and vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid To remove viewfinder fingerprints and other stains apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care Remove dust and lint with a blower When removing fingerprints and other stains wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Do not apply pressure as this could result in damage or malfunction Monitor Do not use alcohol thinner or other volatile chemicals The Low Pass Filter The image sensor that acts as the camera s picture element is fitted with a low pass filter to prevent moir If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in photographs you can clean the filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option or cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off HE Clean Now 1 Place the camera base down Image sensor cleaning is most effective when the camera is placed base down as shown at right A R q ie 4 y Ss 2 Display the Clean
204. ibes how to play back photographs and details the operations that can be performed during playback Full Erame Play bach ivivcscccccosccsstsscscszcatccesctsssesessstaserecsccuceovaess 204 PHOCG IMTOFIMAUON sas scsserisssectavssssssasioacss susvsootsceeeteescntiavavisenss 207 Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback 216 Taking a Closer Look Playback ZOOM sssssssssssseseeeseees 218 Protecting Photographs from Deletion sssecssee 219 Deleting Photographs cscsssccssssssscscsecesscsccesesesssecssees 220 203 Full Frame Playback To play photographs back D button press the gt button The most recent photograph will be displayed in the monitor T button button MENU button O n button QE button Q button button Main command dial Rotate Tall a To display tall portrait orientation photographs in tall orientation select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu 251 Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review M 206 204 To Description View additional Press gt to view photographs in order recorded lt to view photographs in photographs reverse ord
205. ible program M 107 5 Shutter speed A Aperture The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel Note that the metering method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect changes to metering take effect when the lock is released See Also If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 Shutter release button AE L 273 exposure will lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway For information on changing the role of the AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f7 Assign AE L AF L button 1 296 117 Exposure Compensation Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera making pictures brighter or darker In exposure mode M only the exposure information shown in the exposure indicator is affected shutter speed and aperture do not change To choose a value for exposure compensation press the 4 button and rotate the main command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder button hd 0 EV 0 3 EV 2 0 EV E4 button pressed 118 Exposure compensation can be set to values between 5 EV underexposure and 5 EV overexposure in increments of 1 3 EV In general choose positive values to make the subject brighter negative values to make it darker 1EV No exposure 1EV compensation At values other than 0 0 the 0 at the center of the exposure indicators will flash
206. ider shows position in current menu lean image sensor ock mirror up for cleaning Current settings are shown by icons Menu options Options in current menu If 2 icon is displayed help for current item can be viewed by pressing Om 2 button a 21 18 Using Camera Menus BE Menu Controls The multi selector and button are used to navigate the menus Multi selector Select highlighted item Move cursor up Select Cancel and return highlighted gt to previous menu item or display sub menu button Move cursor down Select highlighted item BE Navigating the Menus Follow the steps below to navigate the menus 1 Display the menus MENU button Press the MENU button to display the I E menus Nikon 2 Highlight the icon for the current menu Press lt 4 to highlight the icon for the current menu SETUP MENU Format memory card LOD brightness 9 Clean image sensor Lock mirror up for cleaning Video mode Homi Time zone and date E Language 19 20 3 Select a menu Press A or W to select the desired menu Delete Playback folder Hide image Display mode Copy image s gt Image review After delete E Rotate tall Position the cursor in the selected menu Press to position the cursor in the selected menu Playback folder y Hi
207. ies e This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point Do not dispose of as household waste For more information contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management Disposing of Data Storage Devices ATTENTION Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada This symbol on the battery indicates that the battery is to be collected separately The following apply only to users in European countries All batteries whether marked with this symbol or not are designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point Do not dispose of as household waste For more information contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user s responsibility Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person erase all data using commercial deletion software or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information for example pictures of empty sky Be sure to also replace
208. image is displayed after an image is deleted M 251 The Playback Menu The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following options Note that depending on the number of images some time may be required for deletion Option Description fom Selected Delete selected pictures ALL All Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback CQ 245 If two cards are inserted you can select the card from which pictures will be deleted Bll Selected Deleting Selected Photographs 1 Choose Selected MENU button Press the MENU button and select Delete in the playback menu Highlight Selected and press gt O Za 2 Highlight a picture is Delete Use the multi selector to highlight a picture to view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the amp button to D Selected view images in other locations press SH and select the desired card and folder as described on page 217 E 221 3 Select the highlighted 7 T Selected picture Press the center of the multi selector to select the highlighted picture Selected pictures are marked by a tr icon Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select additional pictures to deselect a picture highlight it and press the center of the multi selector 4 Press to complete the i Selected operation Tou 3 images A confirmation di
209. information 200 HE Setup Menu Options The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below Auto meter off Choose whether or not the exposure meters will turn off automatically when a GPS unit is attached Option Description Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay This reduces the drain on the Enable battery but may prevent GPS data from being recorded if the shutter release button is pressed all the way down without pausing A Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is Disable connected GPS data will always be recorded e Position This item is only available ifa GPS Emm device is connected when it displays the ETEEN current latitude longitude altitude y Lonsitude E139 43 490 Coordinated Universal Time UTC and ja es heading if supported as reported by the UTC 1 04 2009 01 26 12 GPS device Heading The heading is only recorded if the GPS device is equipped with a digital compass note that the GP 1 is not equipped with a compass Keep the GPS device pointing in the same direction as the lens and at least 20cm 8 in from the camera Coordinated Universal Time UTC UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock 201 202 More About Playback Playback Options This chapter descr
210. information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when no operations are performed see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay Q 274 The roles of the multi selector buttons can be reversed so that the A and buttons display other images and the lt and gt buttons control photo information See Custom Setting f4 Photo info playback m 292 for details Photo Information Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full frame playback There are up to 9 pages of information for each photo Press A or W to cycle through photo information as shown below Note that shooting data RGB histograms and highlights are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for Display mode M 247 shooting data page 4 is only displayed if copyright information was recorded with the photograph as described on page 309 GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when the photo was taken 1 10 NIKON 0300S SA LATITUDE 6 3 i LONGITUDE ANA ALTITUDE P 1 125 F5 6 200 MBAUTO 0 0 sA ESD SAUTO NORMAL E 100D300S DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 4288x2848 15 04 2009 10 15 29 4288x2848 Overview data E 10003005S DSC_0001 JPG 15 04 2009 10 15 29 GPS data m aN R GB Ee Select RGB NTR SPD AP j F4 EXP MODE 150 0 ARTIST NIKON TARO CAL LENGTH COPYRIGHT NIKON AF VR in F FLASH NODE amp Bui ib CMD Le es 43 PN 100 1 RGB histogram Shooting data pages 1 3 Shooting data p
211. ing secccssseseccesseees 129 289 Adobe RGB sssssssssssssescsssssccssssseesssssneeees 166 AE amp flash Auto bracketing set 120 289 AE only Auto bracketing set 120 289 REE AAA 81 116 296 AF ww 74 76 78 82 AF activation srnssnunnininnnonna 266 AF area brackets 11 36 55 AF assist AF fine tune AF point illumination AF point selection AF area mode AF C priority selection AF ON button AF On for MB D10 AF S priority selection After Delete Aperture i Aperture priority auto Approved memory cards Aspect ratio Assign AE L AF L button Assign Fn button Assign preview button Attaching the lens Audio video cable Auto White balance Auto bracketing 120 289 290 Auto bracketing Mode M A Auto bracketing set Auto FP high speed sync Auto image rotation Auto meter off Auto meter off delay Auto area AF Autofocus B Backlight sssssscccsssssccessneeeeeessneees 39 278 Backup Secondary slot function 72 Battery 22 24 37 279 280 307 Battery info 307 Battery order Battery pack Black and white Monochrome 322 Body cap Border Bracketing ssescsccsssescseessees Bracketing order Built in AF assist illuminator 268 112 114 186 276 293 c EEEE cisnentaneeeeece 74 81 263 264 Camera Control Pro 2 Capture NX 2 eseessesceseeeen
212. ing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The current preset is displayed in the control panel while the WB button is pressed Control panel WB button Sub command dial 151 152 EE Entering a Comment Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty six characters for a selected white balance preset 1 Select PRE Preset manual Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu and press gt White balance Incandescent Fluorescent Direct sunlight Flash Cloudy E e Shade 4 Choose color temp PRE Select a preset Highlight the desired preset and press the center of the multi selector White balance E T PRE set Select Select Edit comment Highlight Edit comment and press ie White balance E Preset manual Select image Copy H0 Edit the comment Edit the comment as described on page 255 White balance 1 Sha 10123456789 lt gt 2 NBCDEFGHIJKL WNOPQRSTUVWXYZI Image Enhancement This chapter describes how to optimize sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue using Picture Controls how to preserve detail in highlights and shadows using active D Lighting and how to choose a color space Picture Controls soc cccesscsssucscersssoscsecscesensisesscavesessseecesucertesceures Creating Custom Picture Controls Activa D Lighting eectcencecsccasccccat acts ca
213. ing the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help FC Nikon D300S CAUTIONS Modifications The FCC requires the user be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user s authority to operate the equipment Interface Cables Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment Using other interface cables may exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules Notice for Customers in the State of California WARNING Handling the cord on this product may expose you to lead a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Nikon Inc 1300 Walt Whitman Road Melville New York 11747 3064 U S A Tel 631 547 4200 Notices for Customers in Canada CAUTION This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Notices for Customers in Europe This symbol indicates that this product is to be collected separately The following apply only to users in European countr
214. ings rotate the command dial until the asterisk is no longer displayed choose another mode or turn the camera off a oT O aC mmal i w P jpn RIS Shutter speed 1 2 500 s Shutter speed 1 60 s aperture f 2 8 aperture f 22 See Also See page 372 for information on the built in exposure program 107 108 5 Shutter Priority Auto In shutter priority auto you choose the shutter speed while the camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure To take photographs in shutter priority auto 1 Select exposure mode 5 Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until 5 is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel MODE button Main command dial 2 Choose a shutter speed Rotate the main command dial while the exposure meters are on to choose the desired shutter speed Shutter speed can be set to x 254 or to values between 30 s 3a and 1 8 000 S Ga aa Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects fast shutter speeds to freeze motion Fast shutter speed 1 1 600 Slow shutter speed 1 6 s 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot See Also See page 380 for information on what to do if flashing tus i amp indicator appears in the shutter speed displays Ai Aperture Priority Au
215. interval timer photography take a test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor Remember that the camera will focus before each shot no shots will be taken if the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF Before choosing a starting time select Time zone and date in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date 29 Use of a tripod is recommended Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins To ensure that shooting is not interrupted be sure the battery is fully charged 1 Select Interval timer MENU button shooting eS xo e Active Dighting OFF J Long exp NR OFF High ISO NR NORN Press the MENU button to display the menus Highlight Interval timer shooting in the shooting menu and press P ISO sensitivity settings g Live view mode 2 F Multiple exposure OFF Movie settings y L2H Interval timer shooting OFF 2 Selecta starting trigger Highlight one of the following and press P To start shooting about 3 s after z Soor o0 settings are completed select E OMe Oset 13 42 Now and proceed to Step 4 To choose a starting time select Start time and proceed to Step 3 189 190 3 Choose a start time Press lt or P to highlight hours or minutes press A or W to change The starting time is not displayed if Now is selected for Choose start time Press to continue E Interval timer
216. io of JPEG normal JPEG roughly 1 8 normal image quality JPEG basic Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 16 basic image quality NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG fine and one fine quality JPEG image NEF RAW NEF Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG normal JPEG and one normal quality JPEG image NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG basic and one basic quality JPEG image Size priority selected for JPEG compression NEF RAW Recording The NEF RAW recording item in the shooting menu controls compression M 70 and bit depth 2 70 for NEF RAW images JPEG Compression JPEG images can be compressed for relatively uniform file size or optimal image quality The JPEG compression option in the shooting menu can be used to choose the type of compression A 70 Image quality is set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel QUAL button Main command dial Control panel NEF RAW Once transferred to a computer NEF RAW images can only be viewed using ViewNx available on the supplied Software Suite CD or Capture NX 2 available separately 1 355 JPEG copies of NEF RAW images can be created using the NEF RAW processing option in the retouch menu 327 Note that the option se
217. is delicate and easily damaged If the camera powers off while the mirror is raised the curtain will close automatically To prevent damage to the curtain observe the following precautions e Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is raised If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised a beep will sound and the self timer lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes End cleaning or inspection immediately m Foreign Matter on the Low Pass Filter Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact with the low pass filter during production and shipping The D300S however is designed to be used with interchangeable lenses and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are removed or exchanged Once inside the camera this foreign matter may adhere to the low pass filter where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions To protect the camera when no lens is in place be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the body cap Should foreign matter find its way onto the low pass filter clean the filter as described above or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be r
218. its in this group do not fire Group B Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B The options available are the same as those listed for Group A above Channel Choose from channels 1 4 All flash units in both groups must be set to the same channel 285 286 Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode 1 Adjust settings for the built in flash Choose the flash control mode and output level for the built in flash Note that output level can not be adjusted in mode iy 03 Flash entri for built in flash Commander mode a Built in flash oy Group A Group B Channel Move 2 Adjust settings for group A Choose the flash control mode and output level for the flash units in group A GB 03 Flash entri for builtin flash Commander mode A Y Built in flash ty Group A Group B Channel Move Set CHOK 3 Adjust settings for group B Choose the flash control mode and output level for the flash units in group B E 03 Flash entri for built in flash T Commander mode a W Built in flash E Group A T Group B Channel Comp M TU L M u ode TIL TIL CH 2 Move Set OOK 4 Select the channel iy 03 Flash entri for built in flash Commander mode Mode T Builtinflash EA oy Group A Group B Channel Comp LM 3 RG Move Set TROK 5 Press 6 com pose the shot Compose the shot and arrange the flash units
219. ivity can also be adjusted using the Oia wj ence A M p Long ew NR OFF ISO sensitivity option in the shooting menu High ISO NR Nori i ma 253 E Live view mode 2 Multiple exposure Movie settings El interval timer shooting ISO Sensitivity Settings The settings available depend on the option selected for Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value 270 Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value ISO sensitivity settings available Lo 1 Lo 0 7 Lo 0 3 200 250 320 400 1 3 step 500 640 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 Hi 0 3 Hi 0 7 Hi 1 Lo 1 Lo 0 5 200 280 400 560 800 1 2 step 1100 1600 2200 3200 Hi 0 5 Hi 1 1step Lo 1 200 400 800 1600 3200 Hi 1 If possible the current ISO sensitivity setting is maintained when the step value is changed If the current ISO sensitivity setting is not available at the new step value ISO sensitivity will be rounded to the nearest available setting Hi 0 3 Hi 1 The settings Hi 0 3 through Hi 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 1 EV over ISO 3200 ISO 4000 6400 equivalent Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to noise and color distortion Lo 0 3 Lo 1 The settings Lo 0 3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 1 EV below ISO 200 ISO 160 100 equivalent Use for larger apertures when lighting is bright Contrast is slightly higher than normal in most cases ISO sensitivities of ISO 20
220. kes of camera may not be displayed correctly Some photos are not displayed during playback Select All for Playback folder 245 Tall portrait orientation photos are displayed in wide landscape orientation Select On for Rotate tall V 251 e Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation M 304 e Photo is displayed in image review M 206 Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken 304 Can not delete photo Photo is protected Remove protection 219 Can not retouch picture Picture was not created with D300S 316 Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback Select All for Playback folder N 245 Can not change print order Memory card is full delete photos M 38 220 Memory card is locked SD cards only M 35 Can not select photo for printing Photo is in NEF RAW format Create JPEG copy using NEF RAW processing or transfer to computer and print using ViewNxX supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately Can not print photos Memory card is locked SD cards only M 35 NEF RAW photos can not be printed by direct USB connection Create JPEG copy using NEF RAW processing M 327 or transfer to computer and print using ViewNX supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately m 355 Photo is not displayed on TV Choose correct video mode M 301 Photo is not displayed on high definition video device Confirm that HDMI cable
221. l g 87 Continuous Mode To take pictures in CH continuous high speed and Ct continuous low speed modes 1 Select CH or CL mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to CH or CL Release mode dial 2 Framea photograph focus and shoot While the shutter release button is Fi p pressed all the way down pictures will be taken at about 7 fps in continuous high speed mode or at the frame rate selected for Custom Setting d5 CL mode shooting speed M 276 in continuous low speed mode 88 Power Source and Frame Rate The frame advance rate varies with the power source used Power source Frame advance rate approx Battery EN EL3e 7 fps AC adapter 7 6 fps MB D10 battery pack with EN EL3e battery 7 fps MB D10 battery pack with EN EL4a battery 8 fps MB D10 battery pack with AA size batteries 3 7 7 fps 1 Average frame rate with continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 250 s or faster other settings at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer Frame advance rate when recording NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG pictures with 14 bit selected for NEF RAW recording gt NEF RAW bit depth M 70 is approximately 2 5 fps Frame rate drops when vibration reduction available with VR lenses ison 2 If Onis selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt ISO
222. l be restored the next time the bank is selected Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A B C and D A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option as described on page 255 Custom Settings Bank The bank letter is shown in the information display which can be viewed by pressing the button If settings in the current bank have been modified from default values an asterisk will be displayed adjacent to the altered __ settings in the second level of the Custom pa ES ED ey BAT Settings menu B Reset Custom Settings MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Select Yes to restore default settings forthe EEE current Custom Settings bank See page 369 for a list of default settings Custom settings are not reset when a two button reset is performed 262 a1 AF C Priority Selection MENU button gt Custom Settings menu whenever the shutter release focus priority in continuous servo This option controls whether Focus mode selector button is pressed release priority AF To select continuous servo AF a Autofocus photographs can be taken pi A or only when the camera is in focus rotate the focus mode selector to C Option Description Photos
223. l exposure mode or the start time is in less than a minute a warning will be displayed in the monitor Cover the Viewfinder When taking photos DK 5 eyepiece cap without your eye to the viewfinder remove the DK 23 rubber eyecup you will need to hold the camera firmly and cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap to prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure M out of Memory If the memory card is full the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken Resume shooting 193 after deleting some pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card 191 192 Bracketing Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography If exposure flash or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval regardless of the number of shots specified in the interval timer menu If white balance bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program During Shooting During interval timer photography the icon in the control panel will blink Immediately before the next shooting interval begins the shutter speed display will show the number of in
224. lected for image size does not affect the size of NEF RAW images NEF RAW JPEG When photographs taken at settings of NEF RAW JPEG are viewed on the camera with only one memory card inserted only the JPEG image will be displayed If both copies are recorded to the same memory card both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted If the JPEG copy is recorded to a separate memory card using the Secondary slot function gt RAW primary JPEG secondary option deleting the JPEG copy will not delete the NEF RAW image The Image Quality Menu SHOOTING MENU A a i A Shooting menu bank A Image quality can also be adjusted using the O mananaia S Image quality option in the shooting menu Active folder 100 File naming DSC a 253 EA Primary slot selection CF E Secondary slot function NORM El imase size o 69 70 The following options can be MENU button accessed from the shooting roe e SHOOTING MENU VA menu Press the MENU button to White balance display the menus highlight the desired option and press gt Set Picture Control Manage Picture Control Color space Active D Lighting El Long exp NR BE JPEG Compression Choose the type of compression for JPEG images Option Description s Size priority Images are compressed to produce relatively uniform file size Optimal quality Optimal image quality File size varies with scene recorded
225. lected from NTSC and PAL images can be displayed on external device while camera monitor is on HDMI output Type C HDMI connector camera monitor turns off when HDMI cable is connected Audio input Stereo mini pin jack 3 5mm diameter Ten pin remote terminal Can be used to connect optional remote control GP 1 GPS unit or GPS device compliant with NMEA0183 version 2 01 or 3 01 requires optional MC 35 GPS adapter cord and cable with D sub 9 pin connector Supported languages Supported languages Chinese Simplified and Traditional Danish Dutch English Finnish French German Italian Japanese Korean Norwegian Polish Portuguese Russian Spanish Swedish Power source Battery One rechargeable Li ion EN EL3e battery Power source Battery pack Optional MB D10 multi power battery pack with one rechargeable Nikon EN EL3e EN EL4a or EN EL4 Li ion battery or eight AA alkaline NiMH lithium or nickel manganese batteries EN EL4a EN EL4 and AA batteries available separately A BL 3 battery chamber cover is required when using EN EL4a or EN EL4 batteries AC adapter EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter available separately Tripod socket Tripod socket 1 4 in ISO 1222 Dimensions weight Dimensions WxHxD Approx 147 x 114 x 74 mm 5 8 x 4 5 x 2 9 in Weight Approx 840 g 1 Ib 14 oz without battery memory card body cap or monitor cover O
226. lens number specified using the Non CPU number lens data option Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial BKT Auto to choose the number of shots in the bracketing bracketing program Press the Fn button and rotate the sub command dial to select bracketing increment Gay Dynamic AF area If continuous servo AF focus mode C M 74 is selected when dynamic area AF C3 is chosen for AF area mode 76 the number of focus points can be selected by pressing the Fn button and rotating either of the command dials M 264 None No operation is performed when the command dials are rotated while the Fn button is pressed 296 f6 Assign Preview Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the depth of field preview button either by itself Preview button press or when used in combination with the command dials Preview command dials The options available are the same as for Fn button press M 293 and Fn button dials 1 295 except that the default option for Preview button press is Preview and the default setting for Preview command dials is None f7 Assign AE L AF L Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the AE L AF L button either by itself AE L AF L button press or when used in combination with the command dials AE L AF L command dials The options available for AE L AF L button press are the same as f
227. livaaesare All photos in another folder has g currentfolderare been selectedorHide 245 hidden hidden image used to allow at least one image to be displayed File has been created or modified File does not gt HR using a computer File can not be played containimage iti or different make of back on camera camera or file is corrupt Images created with Cannot select Selected image can otherdevicescannot 316 this file not be retouched be retouched Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution m Movies created with other devices can This movie can The selected movie not be edited not be edited can not be edited Movies must be at 65 least two seconds long Check printer To Check printer Printer error SAUNG sele ct 229 Continue if available Paper in printer is Insert paper of correct J Check paper __ size and select 229 not of selected size z Continue Paper jam _ Paper is jammed in Clear jam and select 229 printer Continue F Insert paper of Out of paper ERDICTISOUEGE selected size and 229 papet select Continue Check ink linkeroor Check ink To resume 229 supply select Continue Out of ink Printeris out of ink Replace inkand select 229 Continue See printer manual for more information Specifications BE Nikon D300S Digital Camera
228. lso appear in the control panel and viewfinder The displays will flash for about six seconds Viewfinder 4 Measure white balance 4 Before the indicators stop flashing frame the gN reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter release button all the way down The camera will measure a value for white balance and store it in preset d 0 No photograph will be recorded white balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus 5 Check the results If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance Saad will flash in the control panel for about six seconds while the viewfinder will show a flashing id Control panel VL 7 Viewfinder If lighting is too dark or too bright the Vlg 41y camera may be unable to measure white balance A flashing na Sa will appear in the control panel and viewfinder for about six seconds Press Control panel the shutter release button halfway to AA a A return to Step 4 and measure white rN EN Bae balance again Viewfinder 145 146 6 Select preset d 0 If the new value for preset white balance will be used immediately select preset d 0 by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial until d 0 is displayed in the control panel 7 Direct Measurement Mode If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Settin
229. lt in AF assist illuminator 268 e2 Flash shutter speed 282 a10 AF ON for MB D10 269 3 Flash cntrl for built in flash 283 b Metering exposure e4 Modeling flash 289 b1 ISO sensitivity step value 270 5 Auto bracketing set 289 b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl 270 e6 Auto bracketing Mode M 290 b3 Exp comp fine tune 270 e7 Bracketing order 290 b4 Easy exposure compensation 271 f Controls b5 Center weighted area 272 fl switch 291 b6 Fine tune optimal exposure 272 f2 Multi selector center button 291 c Timers AE lock f3 Multi selector 292 c1 Shutter release button AE L 273 f4 Photo info playback 292 2 Auto meter off delay 273 f5 Assign Fn button 292 8 Self timer 273 f6 Assign preview button 296 c4 Monitor off delay 274 f7 Assign AE L AF L button 296 d Shooting display f8 Customize command dials 297 d1 Beep 275 f9 Release button to use dial 298 d2 Viewfinder grid display 275 f10 No memory card 299 d3 Viewfinder warning display 275 _ f11 Reverse indicators 299 d4 Screen tips 276 261 Custom Setting Bank MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks Changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others To store a particular combination of frequently used settings select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off and wil
230. ltiple exposure cancels interval timer shooting Other Settings While multiple exposure mode is in effect memory cards can not be formatted and the following can not be changed bracketing and shooting menu options other than White balance and Interval timer shooting note that Interval timer shooting can only be adjusted before the first exposure is taken The Lock mirror up for cleaning and Image Dust Off ref photo options in the setup menu can not be used 187 188 BE nterrupting Multiple Exposures Selecting Multiple exposure in the shooting Pumm menu while a multiple exposure is being recorded displays the options shown at right To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified number of exposures have been taken highlight Cancel and press If shooting ends before the specified number of exposures have been taken a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point If Auto gain is on gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded Note that shooting will end automatically if e Atwo button reset is performed M 182 e The camera is turned off e The battery is exhausted e Pictures are deleted Interval Timer Photography The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals M Before Shooting Select a release mode other than self timer or mirror up Mur when using the interval timer Before beginning
231. m 218 Can protect photos from accidental Protect 219 deletion Can hide selected photos Hide image 245 How do tell if parts of my photos may Display mode 209 be overexposed highlights 247 How do I tell where the camera focused Display Toue focus 209 point 247 Can view photos as they are taken Image review 251 Is there an automatic playback slide Slide show 252 show option EE Retouching Photographs Question Key phrase mo How do l bring out details in shadows D Lighting 319 Can I get rid of red eye Red eye correction 320 Can I crop photographs on the camera Trim 321 Can I create a monochrome copy of a ionoGicome 322 photograph Filter effects 322 are Can I create a copy with different colors Palak balance 323 Can l use the camera to create JPEG copies of NEF RAW photographs NEF RAW Processing 327 Can l overlay two NEF RAW photos to Image overlay 324 make a single image BE Viewing or Printing Photographs on Other Devices Question Key phrase ian Can I view my photos on TV Television playback 239 Can I view my photos in High Definition HDMI 241 Connecting toa How do I copy photos to my computer computer 224 How do print photographs Printing photographs 228 Can print photos without a computer Printing via USB 229 Can print the date on my photographs Time stamp 231 How do l order professional prints Print set DPOF 237 EE Optio
232. main subject appear brighter or reduced to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections Press the Ei4 button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel In general choose positive values to make the main subject brighter negative values Sub command to make it darker dial viewfinder after you release the A button ee E The current value for flash compensation can be confirmed by pressing the BA button bosse Goa 0 EV button pressed At values other than 0 0 a icon will be displayed in the control panel and Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to 0 0 Flash 5E P gajh compensation is not reset when the camerais e5 os a turned off ae eG 1 0 EV Optional Flash Units Flash compensation is also available with optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units The SB 900 SB 800 and SB 600 also allow flash compensation to be set using the controls on the flash unit See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available when setting flash compensation see Custom Setting b3 Exp comp fine tune M 270 177 FV Lock This feature is used to lock flash output allowing photographs to be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame Flash output i
233. me HuLi stamp options as described on page 235 a warning will be displayed if the ainis selected page size is too small 4 start printing Highlight Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before printing is complete press Creating a DPOF Print Order Print Set The Print set DPOF option in the playback menu is used to create digital print orders for PictBridge compatible printers and devices that support DPOF 1 Choose Select set MENU button H c ew Print set DPOF Press the MENU button and select Print set DPOF in the playback menu Highlight Select set and press gt to remove all photographs from the print order select Deselect all aL Select set g Deselect all 2 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card to view images in other locations press amp and select the desired card and folder as described on page 217 To display ma Print set DPOF the current picture in full screen p press and hold the amp button To select the current picture for printing press the Omm button and press A The picture will be marked with a amp icon and the number of prints will be set to 1 Keeping the O n button pressed press A or Y to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press W when the number of prints is 1 Press when all the desired picture
234. me zone The camera clock is automatically set Time zone ene p to the time in the new time zone Set the camera clock M 29 If the clock is not set a Dateandtime blinking icon will appear in the control panel Choose the order in which the day month and year are Date format displayed Turn daylight saving time on or off The camera clock will automatically be advanced or set back one hour The default setting is Off Daylight saving time Language MENU button gt Y Setup menu Choose a language for camera menus and messages The following options are available Dk Dansk Danish PI Polski Polish De Deutsch German Pt Portugu s Portuguese En English English Ru Pycckun Russian Es Espanol Spanish Sv Svenska Swedish Fi Suomi Finnish Z chyz 8288 _ Traditional Chinese Fr Fran ais French fi ha Simplified Chinese It Italiano Italian A Aa Japanese NI Nederlands Dutch oe se Korean No Norsk Norwegian Image Comment MENU button gt Y Setup menu Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNxX supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately Q 355 The comment is also visible on the third shooting data page in the photo information display M 213 Done Save changes and return to the setup menu Input comment Input a comment as described on page 255 Comments can be up to 36 characte
235. mode A aperture priority auto and M manual In other modes exposure mode A is automatically selected when a non CPU lens is attached 1 342 The exposure mode indicator F or 5 in the control panel will blink and A will be displayed in the viewfinder To choose the exposure mode press the MODE MODE button button and rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder Main command dial Depth of Field Preview To preview the effects of aperture press and Preview button hold the depth of field preview button The lens will be stopped down to the aperture value selected by the camera modes P and or the value chosen by the user modes A and allowing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder Custom Setting e4 Modeling Flash This setting controls whether the built in flash and optional flash units that support the Creative Lighting System CLS see page 348 will emit a modeling flash when the depth of field preview button is pressed See page 289 for more information See Also See page 98 for information on auto ISO sensitivity control For information on using the Long exp NR option in the shooting menu for reducing noise at slow shutter speeds see page 258 For information on choosing the size of the increments available for shutter speed and aperture see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl Q 270 For information on
236. mple when measuring preset white balance Calibration This item is displayed only when the camera is powered by an optional MB D10 battery pack equipped with an EN EL4a or EN EL4 battery available separately CAL Due to repeated use and recharging calibration is required to ensure that battery level can be measured accurately recalibrate battery before charging e Calibration not required Battery age A five level display showing battery age O 1H indicates that battery performance is unimpaired 4 8 that the battery has reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced Note that batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 C 41 F may show a temporary drop in charging life the battery age display will however return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 C 68 F or higher The MB D10 Battery Pack The display for the MB D10 battery pack is fy Battery info shown at right The picture meter and battery f oos Bat meter 89 age are not displayed when the battery pack y Picmeter 209 contains AA batteries 5 Batteryage 0 0 4 i 307 Wireless Transmitter MENU button gt Y Setup menu This option is used to adjust settings for connection to a wireless network using an optional WT 4 wireless transmitter See Connections Wireless and Ethernet Networks M 227 Image Authentication MENU button gt Y Setup
237. n AF S DX 17 55mm f 2 8G ED 24mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF 18 35mm f 3 5 4 5D ED 18mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in AF S DX 18 135mm f 3 5 5 6G ED 18mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF S DX VR 18 200mm f 3 5 5 6G ED 18mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF 20 35mm f 2 8D 20 mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in 28 mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in AF S NIKKOR 24 70mm f 2 8G ED 35mm Omi Jin 28 mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in AF S 28 70mm f 2 8D ED Sei 10m 3 ft 3in PC E NIKKOR 24mm f 3 5 ED when not tilted or shifted 2a mm 10m 3ft 3in When used with the AF S NIKKOR 14 24mm f 2 8G ED the flash will be unable to light the entire subject at all ranges The built in flash can also be used with AI S Al Al modified NIKKOR Nikon Series E and non CPU lenses with a focal length of 16 300mm Al 50 300 mm f 4 5 modified Al 50 300 mm f 4 5 and Al S 50 300 mm f 4 5 ED lenses must be used at a zoom position of 135mm or above and Al 50 300 mm f 4 5 ED lenses at a zoom position of 105mm or above m Red Eye Reduction Lenses that block the subject s view of the AF assist illuminator may interfere with red eye reduction 1 AF Assist Illumination The AF assist illumination is available with lenses with focal lengths of 24 200mm It can not however be used to assist the focus operation with the following lenses AF S VR 200mm f 2G ED AF S VR 200 400mm f 4G ED At ranges under 0 7m 2ft 4in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting
238. n single servo AF see Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection Q 264 For information on preventing the camera from focusing when the shutter release button is pressed halfway see Custom Setting a5 AF activation N 266 75 76 AF Area Mode AF area mode determines how the focus point is selected in autofocus mode M 74 To select the AF area mode rotate the AF area mode selector The following options are available AF area mode selector Mode Description a User selects focus point manually camera focuses on Single subject in selected focus point only Use for relatively static compositions with subjects that will stay in selected focus point AF point In continuous servo AF M 74 user selects focus point manually if subject briefly leaves selected focus point camera will focus based on information from surrounding tJ points Number of focus points used can be selected from Dynamic 9 21 and 51 using Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF area ar a AF M 264 If 51 points 3D tracking is selected for Custom Setting a3 focus point will be selected automatically using 3D tracking Insingle servo AF user selects focus point manually camera focuses on subject in selected focus point only Camera automatically detects subject and selects focus point If type G or D lens is used camera can distinguish human subjects from Auto area background for improved subject
239. n value other than 0 is selected for Built in flash gt TTL The icon flashes when the built in flash is in mode M 1 commander Mode Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the monitor preflashes from the built in flash particular care is required when not using a tripod Be sure that direct light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens in TTL mode or the photocells on the remote flash units AA mode as this may interfere with exposure To prevent timing flashes emitted by the built in flash from appearing in photographs taken at short range choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures large f numbers or use an optional SG 3IR infrared panel for the built in flash An SG 3IR is required for best results with rear curtain sync which produces brighter timing flashes After positioning the remote flash units take a test shot and view the results in the camera monitor Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used the practical maximum is three With more than this number the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance e4 Modeling Flash MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If Onis selected when the camera is being Fey Modeling fash used with the built in flash or an optional z SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash unit M oa a modeling flash will be emitted when the of camera dept
240. nal Accessories Question Key phrase um What memory cards can I use gs alas ee 393 What lenses can use Compatible lenses 340 What optional flash units Speedlights Optional flash units 347 can l use What software is available for my Other wecesconiee 355 camera What AC adapters battery packs remote cords and viewfinder A Other accessories 352 accessories are available for my camera Table of Contents Q amp A LINDON acessccavscicssscsisssnssescsasidsvatsazarasusuestecsecvestissvasbeatestnadasdatauneatsenaeaee iv FOE Y OUN SATCCY csssscatecssssecencazessassscsavaissosticsresasanstavesraunsaineauesiestentuiants xviii NOTICES vs sicssdasicusexscscsvcccussvccissnsccossescenssactosensdasssoudetentivsoxacsssketisevesaissiausante XXi Introduction 1 COV SEW IOW oaasi ias EEE ENES a 2 Getting to Know the Camera ceecsssessccssssscssessesseesssnseesenseeeesnseessnees 3 Camera BOY ssssscsssssccssssscssecssssseccssecesnsecssnseessaseccssseecceneesenseessaess 3 The Control Panel sesecsssssccsssscssseecsssteccssseeccssecsesseecssneesesneceenseesees 8 The Viewfinder Display sscccsscssssssssseccssseccsnseccsseesssneeessaeees The Information Display sscsssscsssesccsseccsssseccsseeessseesesnseessaeees The BM 8 Monitor Cover Tutorial 17 Camera MONS sn scsisecestsasdesussverdsoodsnssesenvscnsercsssapesonschsbscedpstesbuseniedbsaeceise 18 Using Camera Menus sesssesssssscsesscsseccseecsseesssescssee
241. ng a memory card slot 45 46 Deleting Unwanted Photographs To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor press the button Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted 1 Display the photograph Display the photograph you wish to delete as described in Viewing Photographs on the previous page 2 Delete the photograph Press the button A confirmation dialog will be displayed the location of the current picture is shown by the icon in the bottom left corner of the dialog T button Press the button again to delete the image and return to playback To exit without deleting the picture press PJ Delete 4 221 To delete multiple images or to select the memory card from which images will be deleted use the Delete option in the playback menu Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View This chapter describes how to frame pictures in the monitor using live view Framing Photographs in the Monitor cscsssssssseeseeees 48 47 Framing Photographs in the Monitor Press the button to frame pictures in the monitor The following options are available Tripod 5 Choose when the camera is mounted on a tripod 49 You can zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor for precise focus making this option suitable for static subjects Contrast detect autofocus can be used to compose photographs
242. ng scsssdeiccceccdsscssebsssnssstusschescvestesdousstosedsseloscedassteubsaccessvascnasebedpsbeces 102 Exposure MOCE esessssscsssessssecsssecsssccssecessccessceessecessccesscessseesssecesseesaes 104 P Programmed AUto sssessssssseessecssseesecessseeseessssessessnneesessnee 106 5 Shutter Priority AUtO wc ssssssesscssssssecssseessecssseeessessnseeessssees 108 Fi Aperture Priority AUTO ssssssesssssseccssecsssseessseessssseessssee 109 Mica tba sasiscsss ccssssansscccstenctdassaccasgactosssventscsenvebercugeescuanstsunecstnenettans 111 LONG TiME EXPOSULES ceessesssesssessseessesssessseesssesseessessssesseesseesseessees 114 Autoexposure AE LOCK esssssssssssssssssssessssecsecssscssssssscssscessesseeess 116 Exposure COMPENSATION esssscsssessescsscncessecsecneensensecseensenseeseeees 118 BRECK OUI e E E E E E 120 White Balance 133 White Balance Option Fine Tuning White Balance Choosing a Color Temperature sesscssesccsssesecsseeecsseeeessseeeensess 141 Preset Mana sscsscsssscssssssisensctsasesacsasesiarverneasiarconaaeeveescaascensaciseecten 142 Image Enhancement 153 Picture CONTHOIS ssssccseeccsseesseeceees Selecting a Picture Control Creating Custom Picture CONtrOls ssssssscsssesseeesseeseesees 160 Active D LIQhting sssesscsssesssssesssosssscrsssseravesersnsesersvesersveserasveesonees 164 Color Space xii Flash Photography 169 The Built in Fla
243. ning on On Off Off Turn AF tuning off Tune AF for the current lens CPU Move focal lenses only Press A or W tochoose point away Current Saved a value between 20 and 20 from camera value value Values for up to 12 lens types can be BAF fine tune stored Only one value can be i Saved value stored for each type of lens araa he t Choose the AF tuning value used Default when no previously saved value Adjust k exists for the current lens CPU Move focal Previous lenses only point toward value camera List previously saved AF tuning values If a value exists for the current lens it will be shown with a 1 icon To delete a lens from the list highlight the desired lens and press i To change a lens identifier for example to choose an identifier that is the same as the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from i other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value list can be used with only one lens of each type highlight the saved desired lens and press gt values The menu shown at right will be displayed press A or W to choose an identifier and press to save changes and exit ie AF fine tune Choose lens number T 18 200e8 F3 5 Y 3 5 5 6 VR No u g 0 99 DOK 312 M AF Tuning The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity when AF tuning is applied M Live View Tripod Mode Tuning is not applied to contrast det
244. nlaciosensnoscedveaboeseshons c1 Shutter Release Button AE L c2 Auto Meter off Delay esssecsssesscsssecsssesecseecesseecesneeees C3 Self TIMEL sessseesceeee c4 Monitor off Delay d Shooting Display d3 Viewfinder Warning Display ssccssscccsseeceessecesneees 275 d4 Screen Tips d5 CL Mode Shooting Speed a d6 Max CONTINUOUS Release uu sessssseessccssseesecessseceecsnneees 276 d7 File Number SEQuence ssssccsssscessseecesseeessseecesnteceeneeees 277 d8 Information Display escssecsssesscsssecssseescsnsecesseeeeneeees 278 d9 LCD NIUMINAtION ee esssessscssseeccccsssecsecsnseeccecssneesesessesecs 278 d10 Exposure Delay Mode d11 MB D10 Battery Type d12 Battery Ordev 280 e Bracketing Flash uu sssssssessccssseessccsssescsessnsecsssssssecsecsnnessseessee 281 e1 Flash Sync Speed ssessssssssccsssecsessecccsseccessecccsneeeesueceeneses 281 e2 Flash Shutter Speed sssssessssssssssssssssssoesssossessssssssssorrseeee 282 e3 Flash Cntrl for Built in Flash ssssssssssssssressssssreesssssssese 283 e4 Modeling Flash 289 e5 Auto Bracketing Set e6 Auto Bracketing Mode M 290 e7 Bracketing OFder cssscssessscssseccssesccsnsscssneesesnecesnseecenseees 290 PAGONTIOMS aaee ne A EA 291 FD eS Wite Reiano EASA 291 f2 Multi Selector Center BUttON sssssssessssssssssssssssssesseseese 291 f3 Multi Selector i 4
245. nly when a CPU lens is mounted on the camera A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended When using a zoom lens zoom all the way in 1 Choose a start option E imase Dust Off ref photo Highlight one of the following i options and press To exit l E A es i 2 jean sensor and then stat without acquiring image dust off data press MENU O Start The message shown at a Image Dust Off ref photo right will be displayed and rEF will i iewfi PRI Take photo of bright appear in the viewfinder and control t tres be panel displays E Focus will be set to infinity Clean sensor and then start Select this option to clean the image sensor before starting The message shown at right will be displayed and rEF will PEF appear in the viewfinder and control panel displays when cleaning is r EF complete vV Image Sensor Cleaning Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed Select Clean sensor and then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing photographs 305 306 2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder With the lens about ten centimeters four inches from a well lit featureless white object frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the shutter release button halfway
246. nserting or removing memory cards Do not remove memory cards from the camera turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while data are being recorded deleted or copied to a computer Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects Do not bend drop or subject to strong physical shocks Do not apply force to the card casing Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card Do not expose to water high levels of humidity or direct sunlight The Write Protect Switch SD memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch to prevent ZA accidental loss of data When this switch E is in the lock position photos can not Write protect switch be recorded or deleted and the memory card can not be formatted To unlock the memory card slide the switch to the write position No Memory Card If no memory card is inserted the control panel and viewfinder will show E If the camera is turned off with a charged EN EL3e battery and no memory card inserted E will be displayed in the control panel See Also See page 301 for information on formatting memory cards using the Format memory card option in the setup menu 35 36 Adjust Viewfinder Focus The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual di
247. ntrolled vertical travel focal plane shutter Speed 1 8000 30 s in steps of 1 3 1 2 or 1 EV bulb X250 Flash sync speed X 1 250 s synchronizes with shutter at 320 s or slower flash range drops at speeds between 1 250 and 1 320 s Release Release mode S single frame CL continuous low speed CH continuous high speed Q quiet shutter release self timer Mup mirror up Approximate frame e With EN EL3e 1 7 fps CL or 7 fps CH advance rate With optional MB D10 multi power battery pack and EN EL4a CIPA guidelines 1 7 CL or 8 fps CH Self timer Can be selected from 2 5 10 and 20 s duration Exposure Metering TTL exposure metering using 1 005 pixel RGB sensor Metering method Matrix 3D color matrix metering II type G and D lenses color matrix metering II other CPU lenses color matrix metering available with non CPU lenses if user provides lens data Center weighted Weight of 75 given to 8 mm circle in center of frame Diameter of circle can be changed to 6 10 or 13 mm or weighting can be based on average of entire frame fixed at 8 mm when non CPU lens is used Spot Meters 3 mm circle about 2 of frame centered on selected focus point on center focus point when non CPU lens is used Range ISO 100 f 1 4 lens 20 C 68 F Matrix or center weighted metering 0 20 EV e Spot metering 2 20 EV Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and
248. ochrome Monochrome Set Picture Control Mounting index Movie settings 105 289 Multi selector center button 291 Multiple exposure 184 402 NEF RAW bit depth ou eeseeesseeeseeeeees NEF RAW processing NEF RAW recording Neutral Set Picture Control 154 Nikon Transfer 224 No memory Card sescccseee 299 No of copies PictBridge Setup menu 230 Non CPU lens Non CPU lens data 0 Optimal quality JPEG compression Optional flash Overflow Secondary slot function Overview data P PAJE SIZO ssssssssasassesnessacsssssvasasssissies 230 235 Phase detection autofocus 48 Photo info Photo info playback PictBridge Picture angle Picture Controls Playback Playback folder ai Playback information 207 247 Playback MEenU sssssssssssssssrssssssssserrsssss 244 Playback slot and folder 217 Playback ZOOM sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssrsssse 218 Predict V sssssseessssscsesssssscsssesssnsnsnsesoosees 75 Predictive focus tracking 74 75 Preset manual White balance cscs 134 142 Press the shutter release button all the Way COWN ssscssssstescecsseeceeenes 44 Press the shutter release button 43 44 80 116 Primary slot selection Print DPOF sssessssssssssssssessssesssssnsseesees Print options PictBridge Setup menu
249. ode see Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash T 283 See page 347 for information on using optional flash units For information on the range of the built in flash see page 174 173 Aperture Sensitivity and Flash Range The range of the built in flash varies with sensitivity ISO equivalency and aperture Aperture at ISO equivalent of Range 200 400 800 1600 3200 m ft 1 4 2 2 8 4 5 6 1 0 12 0 3ft 3in 39ft 4in 2 2 8 4 5 6 8 0 7 8 5 2ft 4in 27ft 11in 2 8 4 5 6 8 11 0 6 6 1 2ft 20ft 4 5 6 8 11 16 0 6 4 2 2ft 13 ft 9in 5 6 8 11 16 22 0 6 3 0 2ft 9ft 10in 8 11 16 22 32 0 6 2 1 2ft 6ft 11in 11 16 22 32 0 6 1 5 2ft 4ft 11in 16 22 32 0 6 1 1 2ft 3ft 7in 22 32 0 6 0 8 2ft 2ft 7in The built in flash has a minimum range of 0 6 m 2 ft In programmed auto exposure mode mode F the maximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to ISO sensitivity as shown below Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of 200 400 800 1600 3200 3 5 4 5 5 6 7 1 For each one step increase in sensitivity e g from 200 to 400 aperture is stopped down by half an f stop If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens 174 Flash Modes The D300S supports the following flash mo
250. ol is not available Y wen when B amp W black and white is selected ot Filter effects bal Toning Cyanotype 4 GBcid Wx Custom Picture Controls The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picture Control was based 159 160 Creating Custom Picture Controls The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom Picture Controls 1 Select Manage Picture MENU button Control eal SHOOTING MENU E PEG compression NEF RAW recording White balance To display the menus press the MENU button Highlight Manage Picture Control in the shooting menu and Set Picture Control 3 i Color space sRGB Active DLighting OFF El Long exp NR OFF press gt 2 Select Save edit E Manave Picture Control Le Highlight Save edit and press 4 gt Po Load save 3 Select a Picture Control By Manage Picture Control E Choose Picture Control Highlight an existing Picture EN Nera Control and press P or press ac uonecuone gt to proceed to step 5 to save a 3 copy of the highlighted Picture GBGrid __ GAdhst Control without further modification 4 Edit the selected Picture iB Vivid Control bed Quick sciust Sharpening F Contrast See page 157 for more 54 Brightness Saturation information To abandon any Hue changes and start over from Bad ES default settings
251. ol mode for the built in flash is shown in the information display ENHA ON i she DS SED A OT EIS dy ABT Manual and Repeating Flash icons blink in the control panel and viewfinder when these options are selected The SB 400 When an optional SB 400 flash unit is attached pS and turned on Custom Setting e3 changes to Optional flash allowing the flash control mode d a E for the SB 400 to be selected from TTL and ph Manual Repeating flash and Commander 5 mode options are not available a 283 284 BE Manual Choose a flash level between Full and 1 128 1 128 of full power At full power the built in flash has a Guide Number of 17 56 m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F HE Repeating Flash The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter 3 Flash ent for builtin flash is open producing a strobe light effect eben Press lt or P to highlight the following noe More Waray options A or W to change ms vi aes eee Option Description Output Choose flash output expressed as a fraction of full power Choose the number of times the flash fires at the selected output Note that depending on shutter speed and the option selected for Frequency the actual number of flashes may be less than selected Frequency Choose how often the flash fires per second Times Times The options available for Times are determined by flash output Output Options
252. ollowing can NOT be used with the D300S TC 16AS AF teleconverter AF lenses for the F3AF AF 80mm Non Al lenses f 2 8 AF 200mm f 3 5 ED Lenses that require the AU 1 focusing AF Teleconverter TC 16 unit 400mm f 4 5 600mm f 5 6 PC 28mm f 4 serial number 180900 800mm f 8 1200mm f 11 or earlier e Fisheye 6mm f 5 6 7 5mm f 5 6 PC 35mm f 2 8 serial numbers 8mm f 8 OP 10mm f 5 6 851001 906200 2 1cm f 4 PC 35mm f 3 5 old type Extension Ring K2 Reflex 1000mm f 6 3 old type 180 600mm f 8 ED serial numbers Reflex 1000mm f 11 serial numbers 174041 174180 142361 143000 360 1200mm f 11 ED serial numbers Reflex 2000mm f 11 serial numbers 174031 174127 200111 200310 200 600mm f 9 5 serial numbers 280001 300490 The Built in Flash The built in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 16 300 mm Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm 2 ft and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below Lens Zoom position Minimum range 18mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF S DX NIKKOR 10 24mm f 3 5 4 5G ED mMm 07m ain 18 mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in AF S DX 12 24mm f 4G ED aera Omi Jin AF S DX NIKKOR 16 85 mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR 16mm 0 7 m 2 ft 4in AF S 17 35mm f 2 8D ED 24mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 i
253. on will be reset 21 254 Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected Option Default Option Default Image quality JPEG Normal White balance Auto Image size Large ISO sensitivity 200 Fine tuning off If the current Picture Control has been modified existing settings for the Picture Control will also be restored See Also See page 368 for a list of default settings 183 184 Multiple Exposure Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures in a single photograph Multiple exposures can be recorded at any image quality setting and produce results with colors noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application because they make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor EE Creating a Multiple Exposure Note that at default settings shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s Extended Recording Times For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s select On for the Image review Q 251 option in the playback menu and extend the monitor off delay using Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay V 274 The maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c4 1 Select Multiple MENU button exposure a SHOOTING MENU a Active Dlishting OFF Press the MENU button to O s He SOW haa display the menus l Highli
254. onds M 34 LCD Brightness MENU button gt Setup menu Press A or W to choose monitor brightness jan Choose higher values for increased brightness lower values for reduced brightness Video Mode MENU button gt Setup menu When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the video connector be sure the camera video mode matches the device video standard NTSC or PAL 301 302 HDMI MENU button gt Setup menu The camera is equipped with an HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface connector allowing pictures to be played back on high definition televisions or monitors using a cable with a type C mini pin connector available separately from commercial suppliers Before connecting the camera to high definition device choose the HDMI format from the options below Option Description AUTO Auto The camera automatically selects the appropriate format 480P 480p progressive 640 x 480 progressive format 576p 576p progressive 720 x 576 progressive format 720p 720p progressive 1 280 x 720 progressive format 1080 1080i interlaced 1 920 x 1 080 interlaced format The camera monitor turns off automatically when an HDMI device is connected Time Zone and Date MENU button gt Setup menu Change time zones set the camera clock choose the date display order and turn daylight saving time on or off Option Description Choose a ti
255. ons can not be combined with options using dials The explanation that follows assumes that bracketing is assigned to the Fn button 121 3 Select an exposure increment Pressing the Fn button rotate the sub command dial to choose the exposure increment Exposure increment AS Fn button Sub command Control panel dial At default settings the size of the increment can be chosen from 1 3 3 and 1 EV The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 3 EV are listed below Control panel display No of shots Bracketing order EVs ae aa PO Mys bistirt 0 0 r Rg 3 0 3 0 0 7 oo Fe no 3 0 3 0 7 0 2 E ao 2 0 0 3 Prag 2 0 0 3 Fe no 3 0 0 3 0 3 5 E oa 5 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 0 7 0 1 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 FUDD ig P 1 PE At tiitiii 0 7 1 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 7 0 3 FSD eines T PREE GP DJ toviti 2 0 3 0 7 1 0 1 3 See Also For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl Q 270 For information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed see Custom Setting e7 Bracketing order M 290 122 4 Framea photograph focus and 7 shoot lt P The camera will vary exposure and or flash level shot by shot according to the bracketing program selected Modifications to exposure are added to those made with ex
256. ophone sensitivity can be adjusted in the Movie settings gt Microphone menu M 62 2 Press the O button The mirror is raised and the view through the lens is displayed in the monitor instead of the viewfinder M The Icon A icon indicates that movies can not be recorded 3 Focus AF ON button Before shooting frame the opening shot and either press D the AF ON button Tripod or j press the shutter release VO button halfway Hand held to amp focus on your subject In hand held mode autofocus is not available after recording begins 4 Start recording Recording indicator Press the center of the multi selector to start recording Both video and monaural sound are recorded do not cover the microphone during recording the built in Time remaining microphone is located on the front of the camera A recording indicator and the time available are displayed in the monitor Exposure can be locked by pressing the AE L AF L button 1116 or altered by up to 3 EV using exposure compensation 1118 Focusing During Recording In tripod mode the camera can be focused by pressing the AF ON button during shooting a beep will not sound when the camera focuses but note that other sounds made during contrast detect autofocus may be picked up by the microphone Autofocus is not available in hand held mode after r
257. or Fn button press M 293 except that AE L AF L button press defaults to AE AF lock and has an additional AF ON option if this option is selected pressing the AE L AF L button has the same effect as pressing the AF ON button to initiate autofocus this option can not be used in combination with AE L AF L command dials The options available for AE L AF L command dials are the same as for Fn button dials V 295 except that AE L AF L command dials defaults to None and lacks 1 step spd aperture option f8 Customize Command Dials __ Wen button gt Custom Settings menu This option controls the operation of the main and sub command dials Option Description Reverse rotation Controls the direction of the command 8 Customize command dials dials Choose No for normal command dial operation Yes to reverse the rotation of the command dials This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB D10 Change main sub If Off is selected the main command 8 Customize command dials dial controls shutter speed and the jg Chanse main sab sub command dial controls aperture If On is selected the main command dial will control aperture and the sub command dial shutter speed This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB D10 Aperture setting If Sub command dial is selected aperture can only be adjusted with the sub command dial or with the main comm
258. ory card See Also For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst see Custom Setting d6 Max continuous release M 276 For information on the number of pictures that can be taken in a single burst see page 394 Self Timer Mode The self timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self portraits To use the self timer mount the camera on a tripod recommended or place the camera on a stable level surface and follow the steps below 1 Select self timer mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to dial 2 Frame the photograph Focus mode selector and focus ss lt 7 g In single servo autofocus 74 photographs can only be taken if the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder Cover the Viewfinder When taking photos DK 5 eyepiece cap without your eye to the viewfinder remove the DK 23 rubber eyecup you will need to hold the camera firmly and cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap to prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure 91 p 92 3 Start the timer Press the shutter release button all the way down to start the timer The self timer lamp AF assist illuminator will start to blink and a beep will begin to sound Two seconds b
259. ose Printer default default for current printer Print time stamp print time and date of recording on photo or No time stamp then press to select and return to previous menu A Time stamp Printer default i Print time stamp Time stamp No time stamp Menu shown at right will be displayed To exit without cropping picture highlight No cropping and press To crop picture highlight Crop and press gt If Crop is selected dialog shown Paame at right will be displayed Press amp to increase size of crop to decrease Choose position of crop using multi selector and press 3 ROK A topping No cropping Cropping Page Size Border Time Stamp and Cropping Choose printer default to print at current printer settings Only options supported by the current printer can be selected Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes 231 232 4 start printing Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been printed press A Printing OH Cancel Printing Multiple Pictures o utton 1 Display the PictBridge MENU menu m T OF Press the MENU button in the PictBridge playback display see Step 3 on page 229 2 Choose Print select or Print PictBridge DPOF Highlight one of the following Print DPOF options and press gt P Index print
260. osures interval timer photography and using GPS units and non CPU lenses Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settingg 182 Multi ples EXPOSUNG miccccccocsssecsccecscrersctecsssurtctseccstccereeseessacteecees 184 Interval Timer Photography ccscsccssssssssscsesecesssecsoes 189 NOITAA ETTE E E A E 195 Usinga GRS UNIT keeseen etneco rotot eers rE erants seisen aens 198 181 182 Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings The camera settings listed below can be restored to default values by holding the QUAL and buttons down together for more than two seconds these buttons are marked by a green dot The control panel turns off button QUAL button briefly while settings are reset Option Default Option Default Focus point Center Bracketing Off 2 Exposure mode Programmed Flash mode Front curtain auto sync Flexible program off Flash off Exposure off compensation compensation FV lock Off AE hold Off Multiple exposure Off 1 Custom Setting f7 Assign AE L AF L button 2 296 is unaffected 2 Number of shots is reset to zero Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV exposure flash bracketing or 1 white balance bracketing wo Auto is selected for the second shot of two shot ADL bracketing programs The following shooting menu options will also be reset Only settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank opti
261. p cable 239 224 229 e Warranty e Software Suite CD ROM User s Manual this guide e Registration card Quick Guide U S A only Software Installation Guide Symbols and Conventions To make it easier to find the information you need the following symbols and conventions are used es vV This icon marks cautions information that should be read before use to prevent damage to the camera This icon marks notes information that should be read before using the camera QA This icon marks references to other pages in this manual Menu items options and messages displayed in the camera monitor are shown in bold Trademark Information Macintosh Mac OS and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation The SD logo is a trademark of the SD Card Association PictBridge and the SDHC logo are trademarks HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders D3O0s Q amp A Index Table of Contents Introduction Tutorial Framing Pictures in
262. p MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If High high pitch or Low low pitch is selected a beep will sound at the selected pitch while the self timer is active or when the camera focuses using single servo AF Note that a beep will not sound when the camera focuses during movie recording or in quiet shutter release mode mode Q or if Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection Q 264 D appears in the control panel and information display when the beep is on d2 Viewfinder Grid Display MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose On to display on demand grid lines in the viewfinder for reference when composing photographs d3 Viewfinder Warning Display MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose On to display a low battery icon Ca REE in the viewfinder when the battery is low y A os Off 275 276 d4 Screen Tips MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose On to display tool tips for items BA Screen tps selected in the information display a g ott 2 d5 CL Mode Shooting Speed MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the maximum frame advance rate in PEZET CL continuous low speed mode during j ar aa r A ps interval timer photography this setting also SESE ETEL determines the frame advance rate for single Fiats E frame Note that the frame advance rate a may drop below the selected value at slow
263. paused during shooting any shots remaining in the current interval will be canceled 193 194 HE Interrupting Interval Timer Photography Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is exhausted Interval timer photography can also be ended by e Selecting Start gt Off in the interval timer menu e Performing a two button reset M 182 e Selecting Reset shooting menu in the shooting menu 256 e Changing bracketing settings 2 120 Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends EE No Photograph Photographs will not be taken if the previous photograph has yet to be taken the memory buffer or memory card is full or the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF note that the camera focuses again before each shot Release Mode Regardless of the release mode selected the camera will take the specified number of shots at each interval In CH continuous high speed mode photographs will be taken at a rate of up to 7 shots per second In single frame and C continuous low speed modes photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d5 CL mode shooting speed M 276 in mode Q camera noise will be reduced Using the Monitor Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress The monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds before each interval Shooting Menu
264. ped copy of the selected photograph The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow create a cropped copy as described in the following table To Use Description 3 a i Reduce size of crop a Press the button to reduce the size of the crop F Press the amp button to increase the size Increase size of crop Q of the crop __J Rotate the main command dial to Change crop aspect ratio lt lt gt 7 switch between aspect ratios of 3 2 PRA 4 3 5 4 1 1 and 16 9 Use multi selector to move the crop to Move crap another area of the image Press center of multi selector to Preview qop preview cropped image Create copy Save the current crop as a separate file Trim Image Quality and Size Copies created from NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG or TIFF RGB photos have an image quality 1 68 of JPEG fine cropped copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio Aspect ratio 3 2 3 424 x 2 280 2 560 x 1 704 1 920 x 1 280 1 280 x 856 960 x 640 640 x 424 3 3 424 x 2 568 2 560 x 1 920 1 920 x 1 440 1 280 x 960 960 x 720 640 x 480 4 3 216 x 2 568 2 400 x 1 920 1 808 x 1 440 1 200 x 960 896 x 720 608 x 480 1_ 2 560 x 2 560 1 920 x 1 920 1 440 x 1 440 960 x 960 720 x 720 480 x 480 16 9 3 424 x 1 920 2 560 x 1 440 1 920 x 1 080
265. peed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter priority auto or manual exposure modes select the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed 30 s or bulb An X flash sync indicator will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder Auto FP High Speed Sync Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright sunlight The information display flash mode indicator shows FP when auto FP high speed sync is active 281 Flash Control at 1 320 s Auto FP When 1 320 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 281 the built in flash can be used at shutter speeds as fast as 1 320 s while optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB R200 flash units can be used at any shutter speed Auto FP High Speed Sync Flash sync speed 1 320 s Auto FP 1 250 s Auto FP 1 250s Peel Built in Optional Built in Optional Built in Optional Shutter speed flash flash unit flash flash unit flash flash unit 1 8 000 320 S Auto FP Auto FP 1 320 1 250 S Flash sync Auto FP 1 250 30 s Flash sync Flash range drops as shutter speed increases Flash range will nevertheless be greater than that obtained at the same speeds with Auto FP M Th
266. perating environment Temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Humidity Less than 85 no condensation e Unless otherwise stated all figures are for a camera with a fully charged battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 C 68 F Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain MH 18a quick charger Rated input AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Rated output DC 8 4 V 900 mA Supported batteries Nikon EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery Charging time Approx 2 hours and 15 minutes when battery is fully discharged Operating temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Dimensions W x H x D Approx 90 x 35 x 58 mm 3 5 x 1 4 x 2 3 in Length of cord Approx 1800 mm 5 ft 11 in Weight Approx 80 g 2 8 oz excluding power cable EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery Rated capacity 7 4V 1500 mAh Dimensions WxHxD Approx 39 5 x 56 x 21 mm 1 6 x 2 2 x 0 8 in Weight Approx 80 g 2 8 oz excluding terminal cover Supported Standards DCF Version 2 0 The Design Rule for Camera File System DCF is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera DPOF Digital Print Ord
267. pies Viewing Resized Copies Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed Image Quality Copies created from NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG or TIFF RGB photos have an image quality 1 68 of JPEG fine copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original Side by Side Comparison MENU button gt gh retouch menu Compare retouched copies to the original photographs This option is only available if the button is pressed to display the retouch menu when a copy or original is played back full frame EE Making a Side by Side Comparison 1 Selecta picture Select a retouched copy shown by a gh icon ora photograph that has been retouched in full frame playback and press 2 Select Side by side comparison Highlight Side by side m Ca Resize comparison and press fers Side byside comparison OK 2 unel 331 332 3 Compare the copy with the Options used to original create copy The source image is displayed on the left the retouched copy on the right with the options used to create the copy listed at the top of the display Press lt or P to switch between the source image and the retouched copy To view the highlighted picture full frame press and hold the amp button If the copy was created from two images using Image overlay press A or W to view the other source image To exit to playback mode press the
268. posure compensation see page 118 making it possible to achieve exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV While bracketing is in effect a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the control panel A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot No shots 3 increment 0 7 Display after first shot s2197 LIYA Exposure increment Exposure increment Exposure increment OEV 1 EV 1 EV 123 124 BE Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero GF and ai is no longer displayed in the control panel The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset M 182 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated Exposure and Flash Bracketing In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken Shooting will resume the next time the shutter release button is pressed In other modes one shot will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card h
269. r Remote SB 900 SB 900 SB 900 Flash mode feature SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB 800 SU 800 SB 800 SB 600 SB R200 TTL a vlelelvlvlvlvliv AA Auto aperture Yt L GS wi M A Non TTL auto vt Oj l loM GN Range priority manual M Manual Yv Y Vje Y Y Vv Vv RPT Repeating flash Y l Yv Vv Vv Yv Auto FP High Speed Sync Y v vY Y Y v vY FV lock Y Y Y Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv AF assist for multi areaAF YW YW ow Vv Flash Color Information v v v Communication REAR Rear curtain sync Yv Y Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Red eye reduction v Y Vv Vv Power zoom Vv Yv v Only available when SU 800 is used to control other flash units 2 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit 3 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering 4 Selected with flash unit Non TTL auto A selected automatically if non CPU lens is attached without specifying lens data using Non CPU lens data 5 Auto aperture AA is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit Non TTL auto A selected automatically if non CPU lens is attached without specifying lens data using Non CPU lens data ONO Selected with flash unit Can be selected with camera Select 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 281 9 CPU lens required Other Flash Units The following flash units can be used in non T
270. r example a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K Mired calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 106 is a measure of color temperature that takes such variation into account and as such is the unit used in color temperature compensation filters E g 4000 K 3000 K a difference of 1000 K 83 mired 7000 K 6000 K a difference of 1000 K 24 mired 139 140 HE The WB Button At settings other than KI Choose color temp and PRE Preset manual the WB button can be used to fine tune white balance on the amber A blue B axis 1 138 to fine tune white balance when I or PRE is selected use the shooting menu as described on page 137 Six settings in both directions are available each increment is equivalent to about 5 mired M 139 Press the WB button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel Rotating the sub command dial to the left increases the amount of amber A Rotating the sub command dial to the right increases the amount of blue B At settings other than 0 a 4 icon appears in the control panel KN i g C DJ WB button Sub command dial WA Control panel Choosing a Color Temperature When KI Choose color temp is selected for white balance color temperature can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command
271. r of the multi selector to copy the white balance value for the highlighted photograph to the selected preset If the highlighted photograph has a comment 2 303 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset Choosing a White Balance Preset Press A to highlight the current white balance EEE preset d 0 d 4 and press gt to select another preset a gt Change Edit comment Select image Copy H 149 150 EE Selecting a White Balance Preset To set white balance to a preset value 1 Select PRE Preset manual Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu and press gt iy White balance O Incandescent Fluorescent Direct sunlight Flash T a Cloudy E Shade Gi Choose color temp Kl PRE Select a preset Highlight the desired preset and press the center of the multi selector To select the highlighted preset and display fine tuning menu 2 138 without completing the next step press instead of pressing the center of the multi selector E White balance x Wik EF rl a2 Y w 2 PRE sSelet Pset Select Set Highlight Set and press gt Fine tuning menu for the selected white balance preset is displayed CO 138 E White balance E Preset manual Edit comment Select image Copy HD Selecting a White Balance Preset the WB Button At a setting of PRE Preset manual presets can also be selected by press
272. rame using the multi selector E220 00s Contrast detect focus point To focus using contrast detect AF ON button autofocus press the AF ON button The focus point will blink green and the monitor may brighten while the camera focuses If the camera is able to focus using contrast detect autofocus the focus point will be displayed in green if the camera is unable to focus the focus point will blink red m Contrast Detect Autofocus The camera will not continue to adjust focus while the AF 0N button is pressed in continuous servo autofocus mode In both single servo and continuous servo autofocus modes the shutter can be released even when the camera is not in focus Manual focus focus mode M M 83 Use zoom for precise focus To magnify the viewinthe amp button monitor up to 13 x and check focus press the amp button While the view through the lens is zoomed in a navigation window will appear in the bottom right corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor Press to exit zoom 5 Take the picture Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to take the picture The monitor turns off during shooting 6 End live view Press the i button to end live view vV Focusing with Contrast Detect Autofocus Contrast detect autofo
273. reater than the actual focal length of the lens Zoom Lenses Lens data are not adjusted when non CPU lenses are zoomed in or out After changing the zoom position select new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture 195 196 HE The Non CPU Lens Data Menu 1 Select Non CPU lens MENU button data wel o SETUP MENU Image authentication Copyright infi i Press the MENU button to 5 4 saad ita GPS display the menus Virtual horizon Highlight Non CPU lens beem mut data in the setup menu ioe and press P 2 Select a lens number E Nom lt PU lens data Highlight Lens number and Done press lt or gt to choose a lens A number between 1 and 9 Maximum aperture a Move 3 Select a focal length E Non CPU lens data Highlight Focal length mm and press lt or P gt to choose a Done us Lens number Focal length mm focal length between 6 and Maximum aperture 4 000 mm 2 Move 4 Select amaximum Bay Non CPU lens data aperture x Done Highlight Maximum aperture 3 on and press lt or P to choose a Maximum aperture maximum aperture between g OMove f 1 2 and f 22 The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum aperture of the teleconverter and lens 5 Select Done Ba Non CPU tens data Highlight Done and press The specified focal length and ee un aperture will be stored under Maximum aperture t
274. reduction 259 p AE L AF L button assignment 296 JE Active D Lighting 164 EJ Picture Control sssssssesenen 154 4 Color ieee eee 166 i Long exposure noise Depth of field preview button reduction sssssssssssssssssssssoosossssererseee 258 7 ASSIGMMENL eessccesssseeceessseeceeeneee 296 g Custom settings banK 262 Tool Tips A tool tip giving the name of the selected item appears in the information display Tool tips can be turned off using Custom Setting d4 Screen tips Q 276 Viewing Button Assignments and icons indicate the button press function W292 296 performed respectively by the depth of field preview button Fn button and AE L AF L button The button dials functions M 295 are indicated by and icons If separate functions have been assigned to button press and button dials the latter assignment can be viewed by pressing the 8 button 15 16 The BM 8 Monitor Cover A clear plastic cover is provided with the camera to keep the monitor clean and protect it when the camera is not in use To attach the cover insert the projection on the top of the cover into the matching indentation above the camera monitor and press the bottom of the cover until it clicks into place To remove the cover hold the camera firmly and pull the bottom of the cover gently outwards as shown at right CZ
275. ress gt Tripod E E Press the button p a oe The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor z instead of the button viewfinder 52 Frame a picture in the monitor To magnify the view in the monitor up to 3 x press the amp button Q button While the view through the lens is zoomed in a a eat d PS navigation window will appear in the bottom right g O corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll w4 within the AF area brackets v 4 Focus Autofocus focus mode S or C Press the shutter release v button halfway or press the AF ON button The camera will A focus normally and set exposure Note that the mirror will click back into place while either button is pressed temporarily interrupting live view Live view is restored when the button is released Manual focus focus mode M 83 Focus using the lens focusing ring 5 Take the picture 7 Press the shutter release button the rest E of the way down to reset focus and exposure and take the picture The monitor turns off during shooting 6 End live view Press the button to end live view 53 54 1 No Picture After shooting play the picture back in the monitor to ensure that the photograph has been recorded In hand held mode note that the sound t
276. results in the monitor In i TTL use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels as this may produce incorrect exposure M Notes on Optional Flash Units Continued The SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 provide red eye reduction while the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 provide AF assist illumination with the following restrictions SB 900 AF assist illuminationis 888555885 28888838880 o fa 90000000000 a available for all focus points 888500909 with 17 135 mm AF lenses 17 19mm 20 105 mm 106 135 mm however autofocus is not available with the focus points shown in gray SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 With Bec saeee J geeccceees J 550080 24 10 mm AF lenses AF 24 34mm 35 49mm 50 105 mm assist illumination is not available with the focus points shown in gray With other flash units the camera AF assist illuminator is used for AF assist illumination and red eye reduction In programmed auto the Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of maximum aperture minimum f 200 400 800 1600 3200 number is limited according to 5 56 7 1 8 10 sensitivity ISO equivalency as shown at right M Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories Use only Nikon flash units Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation but damage the sync circuitry of
277. ribution of tones to the right while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see photographs in the monitor Playback Zoom To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is displayed press amp Use the amp and QE buttons to zoom in and out and scroll the image with the multi selector The histogram will be updated to show only the data for the portion of the image visible in the monitor Histograms Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications 211 BE Shooting Data Page 1 Exposure mode ISO sensitivity 2 i Exposure compensation Optimal exposure tuning J Focal length eemennemmenennen Lens data 1 Protect status 2 Retouch indicator Focus mode Lens VR vibration reduction 4 Flash mode a Flash compensation sssssseesecceceeneee Commander mode group name flash 315 control mode flash compensation 285 Metering method 102 Ej Camera name Shutter speed 108 111 w Folder number frame number 256 Aperture sssssssssssssssssssassassssascasseassies 109 111 1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode 2 247 2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on 3 Displayed if Custom Setting b6 Fine tune optimal
278. rom 9 21 and 51 based on subject movement note that only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder the remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation Option Description If the subject leaves the selected focus point the camera will focus based on information from the surrounding eight focus points Choose when there is HH time to compose the photograph or when photographing subjects that are moving predictably e g runners or race cars on a track 9 9 points Option Description If the subject leaves the selected focus point the 3 21 21 points camera will focus based on information from the wn surrounding 20 focus points Choose when i photographing subjects that are moving unpredictably e g players at a football game If the subject leaves the selected focus point the fa 51 51 points camera will focus based on information from the 2 surrounding 50 focus points Choose when photographing subjects that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the viewfinder e g birds 3 3D 51 points 3D tracking ee 3D If the subject leaves the selected focus point the camera will use 3D tracking to track the subject and select a new focus point as required Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically from side to side e g tennis players If the subject leaves the viewfinder remove your finger from t
279. rs long Attach comment Select this option to Ba Image comment attach the comment to all subsequent photographs Attach comment can be Y Done turned on and off by highlighting it and E A pressing Pb 2 303 Auto Image Rotation MENU button gt Y Setup menu Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on camera orientation allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback M 204 or when viewed in ViewNxX supplied or in Capture NX 2 available separately Q 355 The following orientations are recorded i Wesco Landscape wide Camera rotated 90 Camera rotated 90 orientation clockwise counter clockwise Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected Choose this option when panning or taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down Rotate Tall To automatically rotate tall portrait orientation photographs for display during playback select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu 2 251 Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review M 206 304 Image Dust Off Ref Photo MENU button gt Setup menu Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 available separately for more information see the Capture NX 2 manual Image Dust Off ref photo is available o
280. s adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture To use FV lock 1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button BB 15 Asion Fn button Select FV lock for Custom Setting f5 Assign Fn button gt Fn button press Brasher 11 292 Senos E tis AF lock only 2 Press the flash pop up button The built in flash will pop up and begin charging Flash pop up button 3 Focus Position the subject in the center of the frame and press v the shutter release button halfway to focus 178 4 Lock flash level After confirming that the flash ready indicator is displayed in the viewfinder press the Fn button The flash will emit a monitor preflash to determine the appropriate flash level Fn button Flash output will be locked at this level and FV lock icons m will appear in the control panel and viewfinder 5 Recompose the photograph 6 Take the photograph Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot If desired additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock 7 Release FV lock Press the Fn button to release FV lock Confirm that the FV lock icons m are no longer displayed in the control panel and viewfinder vV Using FV Lock with the Built in Flash FV lock is only available with the built in flash when TTL is selected for Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash
281. s can be taken with AA batteries Z 396 The capacity of AA batteries drops sharply at temperatures below 20 C 68 F and varies with make and storage conditions in some cases batteries may cease to function before their expiry date Some AA batteries can not be used due to their performance characteristics and limited capacity alkaline and nickel manganese batteries should only be used if no alternative is available and then only at warmer temperatures The camera shows the level of AA batteries as follows Control panel Viewfinder Description mm Batteries fully charged z cA Low battery Ready fresh batteries a CA blinks blinks Shutter release disabled Change batteries Battery level for EN EL3e EN EL4a or EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion batteries is displayed normally 279 d12 Battery Order MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose whether the battery inthe camera or PEZEN the batteries in the battery pack are used first when an optional MB D10 battery pack is LI Use MB D10 batteries first OR attached P DOOS Use camera battery first A icon is displayed in the camera control panel when the batteries in the MB D10 are in use The MB D10 Battery Pack The MB D10 takes one EN EL3e EN EL4a or EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion battery or eight AA alkaline Ni MH lithium or nickel manganese batteries an EN EL3e is supplied with the camera EN
282. s have been selected 237 238 3 Select imprint options i Print set DPOF D Select set Highlight the following options and press to toggle the highlighted H option on or off to complete the print E C morn date order without including this B information proceed to Step 4 Data imprint Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order Imprint date Print date of recording on all pictures in print Y order 4 Complete the print order i Print set DPOF W Select se Highlight Done and press i N to complete the print order E anms O Imprint date I Print Set To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer select Print DPOF in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in Printing Multiple Pictures to modify and print the current order M 233 DPOF date and data imprint options are not supported when printing via direct USB connection to print the date of recording on photographs in the current print order use the PictBridge Time stamp option The Print Set option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory card to store the print order Images created at image quality settings of NEF RAW 2 68 can not be selected for printing using this option Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device after the print order is created
283. s may not be visible when photographs are viewed ona television screen Slide Shows The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for automated playback M 252 Audio When a movie with sound recorded in stereo using an external microphone is viewed on a television connected to the camera via an A V cable the audio output is monaural HDMI connections support stereo output Volume can be adjusted using television controls the camera controls can not be used High Definition Devices The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type C mini pin HDMI cable available separately from commercial sources 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable 2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown Connect to camera K JA one NA EE Connect to high definition device 3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel 4 Turn the camera on and press gt button During playback images will be displayed on the high definition television or monitor screen the camera monitor will remain off Movies To display or hide a guide in the monitor when viewing movies on an HDMI device press the amp button HDMI At the default setting of Auto the camera automatically selects the appropriate HDMI format for the high definition device The HDMI format can be chosen using the HDMI option in th
284. s pressed If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on White Balance Keeping Colors True The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of the light source The human brain is able to adapt to changes in the color of the light source with the result that white objects appear white whether seen in the shade direct sunlight or under incandescent lighting Unlike the film used in film cameras digital cameras can mimic this adjustment by processing images according to the color of the light source This is known as white balance This chapter covers white balance settings White Balance Options scscsssscssscesssrsssecessarscsarscsecers 134 Fine Tuning White Balance sssscsssesssscesessseeeseseeeeesees 137 Choosing a Color Temperature secesscessseeeseeesesseseeers 141 PresetiMia ni Uallceccaseccccesvascctestecectoreetecenctcsanttorsacsenechosetestocetis 142 133 134 White Balance Options For natural coloration choose a white balance setting that matches the light source before shooting The following options
285. sccousensedussdastsessd 63 Editing MOViE Seninsnnannenenaan anna 64 Image Recording Options 67 imag Quality esrssraninaa 68 MAGE SIZOscasscasssveseascsssstsasonsscacsssssssszcsacbazsodistssscasseassasactuscuvanbasecansceceesiens 71 Using TWo Memory Cards ssssscsssssecsssescssseecssseeccssecsesneceesseeeessees 72 Focus 73 FOCUS MOCE wsesecscssscssovsscscssossictsscceutacesetasteosecedsadasvetsersonduensetendcatasisaiies 74 AF Area MOE cssssssssscsssccsssccssscesseccssccessccessccessccsusecsueeesueessecesseeesseense 76 FOCUS Point SELECTION csssscsssscssseccssecsssccssecessscessccesseeesuceesuecesscecsiee 78 FOCUS LOCK ssssssscscsssschasccnacesbsssesccecacsnsssacosssnctencosscendaseassecoscebasbolasicessasezsise 80 Man al FOCUS issscccssccisssevecestssceavechassbssuasiascennacsseststasnsiaciatencainsteeaneats 83 Release Mode 85 Choosing a Release Mode on cessscssessccssesscsseesessseecessseceenneecensseeessees 86 CONTINUOUS MOCE sesscsssecsssecesseccseecessecsusecsuccessccsssecessecssueeesueeeseeeets 88 Self Timer MOCe sssscsssscsssecsssccssscesssccssccesssecssceessecessceessecessecesseesssees 91 Mirror up MOE ssscssseccsssccsseccsseccsscccsseccsscesuscesseecsuseesuecesaeecsueesseees 93 xi ISO Sensitivity 95 Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually sessssscsssecsseecsseccsseceseeeees 96 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control sssssessssssesssssssseessssseeeesssseeesssseeessssseeees 98 SJ Exposure 101 Meti
286. sceectesscsecsccccsasasscctte sacctecncs GOlOM S pacente i rea Ee sess sorettrestastasestacccsctectececs 153 154 Picture Controls Nikon s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing settings including sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue among compatible devices and software Selecting a Picture Control The camera offers a choice of preset Picture Controls Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene Option Description ESD Standard Standard processing for balanced results Recommended for most situations ENL Neutral Minimal processing for natural results Choose for photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched ENI Vivid colors Pictures are enhanced for a vivid photoprint effect Choose for photographs that emphasize primary EMC Monochrome Take monochrome photographs 1 Select Set Picture Control To display the menus press the MENU button Highlight Set Picture Control in the shooting menu and press gt MENU button LL m Y o Le SHOOTING JPEG compression ip NEF RAW recording White balance MENU AUTO Set Picture Control 3S0 Manage Picture Control Color space Active Dishting Long exp NR shits OFF OFF 2 Select a Picture Control Highlight the desired Picture Control and press 8 a a Se
287. sensitivity auto control in the shooting menu M 98 frame advance rate in continuous high speed mode is approximately 7 5 fps 3 Frame rate slows at low temperatures and when batteries are low Buffer Size The approximate number of images that can be stored in the memory buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure count displays in the viewfinder and control panel while the shutter release button is pressed The illustration at right shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about 37 pictures m 89 p 90 The Memory Buffer The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession note however that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full While photographs are being recorded to the memory card the access lamp next to the memory card slot will light Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the mem
288. ses by a letter on the lens barrel Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring CPU contacts Aperture ring aI it i cPUlens Type Glens Type D lens Compatible CPU Lenses 1 camera setting Focus mode Exposure Metering system mode 5 pis M ake c c 3 S M 3D Color CJ Lens accessory rangefinder Type G or D AF NIKKOR 3 AF S AF I NIKKOR VEE PC E NIKKOR series v Yt tt v4 PC Micro 85mm f 2 8D v Y lvi y v AF S AF I Teleconverter 8 v YV vivi v v Other AF NIKKOR 9 j 3 except lenses for F3AF we elle Al P NIKKOR vy ViVvivi ivi wv 1 IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used 2 Vibration Reduction VR supported with VR lenses 3 Spot metering meters selected focus point 4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting 5 The camera s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work properly when shifting and or tilting the lens or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used 6 Manual exposure mode only 7 Can be used with AF S and AF I lenses only A 341 8 With maximum effective aperture of f 5 6 or faster 9 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80 200mm f 2 8 AF 35 70mm f 2 8 AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 lt New gt or AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 lens at maximum zoom in focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte screen in viewfinder is not in focus
289. sesssssssecssseecccssecssnscecssseccssusecsssseeecaneceesueessaneesene 259 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings 260 Custom Setting BanK s sssssssssssssrssssssssseserssrssesserseesessserse 262 B Reset Custom Settings esessssssssscsccscccssesseceeeeesnensseeseeeess 262 A AUTOFOCUS iissa naiiai 263 a1 AF C Priority Selection s sssessssssssesssssssseserssssssrressssssre 263 a2 AF S Priority Selection ss ssssesssssssseserssssserrssssssrressssssree 264 a3 Dynamic AF Area a4 Focus Tracking with Lock On 0 sssssssessecstecssseseeenseees 266 aD AF ACTIVATION sessosisecsussosascstnossuvscenssonveesssontasestovsnnndsssvogenaoesen 266 a6 AF Point Illumination ss ssssssssssesssssssssressssressseeesssessssresssees 266 a7 Focus Point Wrap Around u ssscsssesccesseesecstecesseseeensees 267 a8 AF Point Selection ss 267 a9 Built in AF assist Illuminator 268 a10 AF ONn for MB D10 sessssssssseccscssssessecssseesscessssesessssesecs 269 xiv b Metering EXPOSure sssssssessecsssecsssssssessecsssessecssseesecessneeeesees 270 b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value uu esesecssseeccsseecessesseesseeeeeess 270 b2 EV Steps for Exposure Ctl ssesssssscccssecesseecccnecessees 270 b3 Exp Comp Fine Tune b4 Easy Exposure Compensation b5 Center Weighted Area 0 b6 Fine Tune Optimal Exposure GTHIMEPS AE LOCK sssscssascccdessecesstesnassesdenstbeansca
290. sets d 0 through d 4 A descriptive comment can be added to any white balance preset 0 152 d 0 Stores last value measured for white balance M 144 This preset is overwritten when a new value is measured d 1 d 4 Store values copied from d 0 M 147 Store values copied Be Wits balance from images on iG Select image memory card M 148 White Balance Presets Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks 1 254 A confirmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to change a white balance preset created in another shooting menu bank no warning is displayed for preset d 0 143 HE Measuring a Value for White Balance 1 Light a reference object Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the final photograph In studio settings a standard gray panel can be used as a reference object Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring white balance in exposure mode adjust exposure so that the exposure indicator shows 0 M 113 Set white balance to PRE Preset manual Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until PRE is displayed in the control panel Main command dial 144 Select direct measurement mode Release the WB button briefly and then press the button until the PRE icon in the control panel starts to flash A flashing 7 will a
291. sh uu cseessssssssccssscccssccsucccsscccssccessecsusecsuccesueeesuseeseeeese 170 Using the Built in Flash ssesssssssccsssssecssesecssseecsssecesnsesenssseeesnsess 171 Flashi ModE S usinas einiaid Flash Compensation EV LOCK E A E Other Shooting Options 181 Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings ss 182 Multiple EXpOSUTre ssescssssccsseccsseccsscesssccssceesscecssecessecessecssseesseessees 184 Interval Timer Photography ssssssssssscssseeccsseeccsseeecsseeeessssesees 189 NONM CPU DET p E E A 195 USING A GPS ONIC cascissssccssssssscesssssssscssstacessessessssssuosessessesecssscasessissencsaes 198 More About Playback 203 Full Frame Playback sesssssssscsssescsssseecssscecsssecssseeesssscessnseesnseesses 204 Photo Information Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback ees 216 Taking a Closer Look Playback Zoom Protecting Photographs from Deletion Deleting Photographs sssscsssssscssessccsseecsssccsssseesssesecssseeesseeeess Full Frame and Thumbnail Playback The Playback Menu sescssssseccsssesccssecssssteccsnessecsseesssseeessneeessnseees Connections 223 CONNECTING to a COMPUTE eaceesseessessesseessessessessssesssesseesseesse 224 Direct USB CONNECTION eessessseecsseecsseccsseccseccsseeessessseceneeessees 225 Wireless and Ethernet Networks ssscsssseccsssseccsseesssesecessees 227 Printing PhHOtographs cssssccssssecssesscsssesecsseccssssecsssesecssseee
292. shutter speeds d6 Max Continuous Release MENU button gt Custom Settings menu The maximum number of shots that canbe Pemut taken in a single burst in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and 100 a Y s a E 1 10 The Memory Buffer Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d6 shooting will slow when the memory buffer fills See page 394 for more information on the capacity of the memory buffer d7 File Number Sequence MENU button gt Custom Settings menu When a photograph is taken the camera i 7 File number sequence names the file by adding one to the last file number used This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or a new memory card is inserted in the camera Option Description When a new folder is created the memory card formatted or a new memory card inserted in the camera file numbering continues from the last number used or from the largest file On number in the current folder whichever is higher If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999 a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001 File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or a new memory card is Off inserted in the camera Note that a new folder is created
293. so that it can be deleted display Om button the photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press the Om E button Removing Protection from All Images To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the Playback folder menu press the O n and i buttons together for about two seconds 219 220 Deleting Photographs To delete the photograph displayed in full frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list press the t button To delete multiple selected photographs or all photographs in the current playback folder use the Delete option in the playback menu Once deleted photographs can not be recovered Note that pictures that are protected or hidden can not be deleted Full Frame and Thumbnail Playback Press the 1 button to delete the current photograph 1 Select an image Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list 2 Press the T button A confirmation dialog will be displayed i button Full frame playback Thumbnail playback F T Delete s t Delete oG Wes Wes Sch A E Cancel E Cancel a Z iby me To delete the photograph press the button ft button again To exit without deleting the photograph press the P button See Also The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the next or previous
294. ss the Fn button to jump to the top item in MY iteminMY MENU Select this option for quick access to a MENU frequently used menu item If image quality is set to JPEG fine JPEG normal or JPEG basic RAW will be displayed in the control panel and an NEF RAW copy will be recorded with the next picture taken after the Fn button is pressed to record NEF RAW copies with a series of photographs keep the shutter release button pressed halfway between shots To exit without recording an NEF RAW copy press the Fn button again NEF RAW No operation is performed when the Fn button is None pressed This option can not be used in combination with Fn button dials V 295 Selecting this option displays a message and sets Fn button dials to None If another option is selected for Fn button dials while this setting is active Fn button press will be set to None 294 HE Fn button dials Selecting Fn button dials for Custom Setting f5 displays the following options Option Description O 1 step spd If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials are rotated changes to shutter speed exposure modes 4 and M and aperture exposure modes A and are aperture made in increments of 1 EV regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl Q 270 Choose non Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to Non GPU CPU lens choose a
295. sseeeees 228 Connecting the Printer ccsssccsssssccsseessssseccssesceeseecesneeeesaseees 229 Printing Pictures One at a TIME wu eesssescsseccssescseeesseeceseeessees 230 xiii Printing Multiple Pictures sssssscssssscsseccsssseccsseesesseesssaeeesene 233 Creating a DPOF Print Order Print Set sessssssescsseseseees 237 Viewing Photographs ON TV sesssssessccseesccssseeesnsesecnsesecsnnseeensees 239 Standard Definition Devices esssesesscssseesssessnesseeenneesseenee 239 High Definition Devices sesssssssscssssecesseessssseccsnseseenessesneeesene 241 J Menu Guide 243 gt The Playback Menu Managing IMages ssessssssssccsseesesees 244 Playback FOldel ssssscsssscsssssscsssessesstecssseeccsseceesneesssneeessneeeenee 245 Hide Image 245 Display Mode 247 Copy Image s 248 IMAGES REVIEW a ibiscovssnsanssssnecoscesvsttuscasesasenasadvensdensesuscandensdsvasteegase 251 After Delete siccscisssssiseassoussesessnaiseasinuseiesssssacesssninissioctnusscosgeinasiate 251 Rotate Tall ierisinde 251 Slide SHOW sisirin nian 252 O The Shooting Menu Shooting Options ccc 253 Shooting Menu Bank u esssssssccssssscssseccssseessseeessneesesneeessneses 254 Reset Shooting Menu 256 Active Folder File NaMiN iasssascssnecsescdsccinsscennsbastcscugnunseensnsicccuetssanenten 258 Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction 258 High ISO NR ess
296. ssssccsesessetbsecsvecoecedsvedonecss Troubleshooting uu csssesccsssssccssseccsseesessseesssseecesssesesssesscnseeseenseesensees For Your Safety To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol A This icon marks warnings To prevent possible injury read all warnings before using this Nikon product BE WARNINGS A Keep the sun out of the frame A Tum off immediately in the event of Keep the sun well out of the frame when shooting backlit subjects Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame could cause a fire Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder Viewing the sun or other strong light source through the viewfinder could cause permanent visual impairment Using the viewfinder diopter control When operating the viewfinder diopter control with your eye to the viewfinder care should be taken not to put your finger in your eye accidentally malfunction Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the equipment or AC adapter available separately unplug the AC adapter and remove the battery immediately taking c
297. sssssssses we 29 302 231 235 Viewfinder sss 10 36 91 191 386 Viewfinder eyepiece 91 191 Viewfinder eyepiece cap i Viewfinder focus Size priority JPEG compression Skylight Slide show Slow sync Speaker Speedlights WB bracketing Auto bracketing set 125 129 289 White balance sssssssesssssssssssssse 125 134 White balance bracketing 125 Standard Set Picture Control 154 Wireless 227 352 Standard i TTL flash for Wireless network digital SLR E A A EOE 170 Wireless transmitter 227 352 Start printing ss ssssssssssssssseesssssss 232 235 WT 4 227 352 T Television ossesssssesssessessssees 239 301 302 Ten pin remote terminal 198 356 Thumbnail Thumbnail playback TIFF RGB Video MOE weeseesscssssssssssessssecssssecessscessnes 301 403 404 aN Nikon No reproduction in any form of this manual in whole or in part except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION NIKON CORPORATION Fuji Bldg 2 3 Marunouchi 3 chome Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 8331 Japan Printed in Europe SB9G01 11 2009 Nikon Corporation 6MB05711 01
298. t Picture Control ESD Standard ENL Neutral EVI Vivid ENC Monochrome i g 2 Grid GaAdiust Preset Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls The Picture Controls supplied with the camera are referred to as preset Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the shooting menu M 160 Custom Picture Controls can be saved to a memory card for sharing among other D300S cameras and compatible software N 163 Optional Picture Controls Additional optional Picture Controls are available for download from Nikon websites The Picture Control Indicator The current Picture Control is shown in the information display when the i button is pressed pre S E59 A BKT Picture Control indicator 155 156 Modifying Existing Picture Controls Existing preset or custom Picture Controls 160 can be modified to suit the scene or the user s creative intent Choose a balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust or make manual adjustments to individual settings r Sharpening F Contrast Brightness Saturation Hue ouaa d CD Grid GOK GDReset 1 Selecta Picture Control Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Set Picture Control menu M 154 and press gt Y EVI Vivid OH EIMC Monochrome GEcrid GaAdiust 2 Adjust settings Press A or
299. t status Manual MF Electronic range finding supported Focus point Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points AF area mode Single point AF dynamic area AF auto area AF Focus lock Focus can be locked by pressing shutter release button halfway single servo AF or by pressing AE L AF L button Flash Built in flash Manual pop up with button release and a Guide Number of 17 56 m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F GN at ISO 100 is 12 39 Flash Flash control TTL i TTL balanced fill flash and standard i TTL flash for digital SLR using 1 005 pixel RGB sensor are available with built in flash and SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB 400 e Auto aperture Available with SB 900 or SB 800 and CPU lens Non TTL auto Supported flash units include SB 900 SB 800 SB 28 SB 27 and SB 22S Distance priority manual Available with SB 900 and SB 800 Flash mode Front curtain sync slow sync rear curtain sync red eye reduction red eye reduction with slow sync Flash compensation 3 1 EV in increments of 1 3 1 2 or 1 EV Flash ready indicator Lights when built in flash or optional flash unit such as SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB 80DX SB 28DxX or SB 50DxX is fully charged blinks after flash is fired at full output Accessory shoe ISO 518 hot shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with built in System
300. t temperatures this display may appear immediately when live view mode is selected Matrix metering is used regardless of the metering method selected The camera adjusts shutter speed and ISO sensitivity automatically 61 62 HE Movie Settings Adjust movie settings before recording 1 Select Movie settings MENU button Press the MENU button to display the menus Highlight Movie settings in the shooting menu and press gt 7 Fal N a SHOOTING MENU Active Dtighting p Long exp NR High ISO NR ISO sensitivity settings Live view mode Multiple exposure El interval timer shooting 2 Choose movie options To choose a frame size highlight Quality and press gt Highlight one of the following options and press to select ey Movie settings a ba Quality Hii gt te Microphone Destination Option Frame size pixels Maximum length 1280 1280 x 720 16 9 1280 x 720 5 min 4 640x424 3 2 640 x 424 20 J22 320X216 3 2 320 x 216 ii To turn the built in or external microphone on or off or to adjust microphone sensitivity highlight Microphone and press gt To turn sound recording off highlight Microphone off and press Selecting any other option turns recording on and sets the microphone to the selected sensitivity To choose a destination when using two memory cards highli
301. ted toward 8 If On is selected the control panel will be illuminated while the exposure meters are active M 39 Select Off for increased battery life d10 Exposure Delay Mode MENU button gt Custom Settings menu At the default setting of Off shutter is released EERIE when the shutter release button is pressed When shooting with Tripod selected in live view mode 49 or in situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures On can be selected to delay shutter release until about 1 s after the shutter release button is pressed and the mirror is raised d11 MB D10 Battery Type MENU button gt Custom Settings menu To ensure that the camera functions as expected when eight AA batteries are used in the optional MB D10 battery pack match the option selected in this menu to the type of batteries inserted in the battery pack There is no need to adjust this option when using EN EL3e or optional EN EL4a or EN EL4 batteries Option Description BLR6 LR6 AA alkaline Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries BNiHH HR6 AA Ni MH Select when using HR6 Ni MH AA batteries BFR6 FR6 AA lithium Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries QZR6 ZR6 AA Ni Mn Select when using ZR6 Ni Mn AA batteries Using AA Batteries EN EL4a or EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion batteries available separately or EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion batteries are recommended for best performance Fewer picture
302. ter default then press to select and return to previous menu Border Menu of border options will be displayed 231 Press A or F to choose print style from Printer default default for current printer Print with border print photo with white border or No border then press to select and return to previous menu Time stamp Menu of time stamp options will be displayed M 231 Press A or W to choose Printer default default for current printer Print time stamp print time and date of recording on photo or No time stamp then press to select and return to previous menu 6 start printing Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been printed press 235 236 BE Creating Index Prints To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card select Index print in Step 2 of Printing Multiple Pictures 1 233 Note that if the memory card contains more than 256 pictures only the first 256 images will be printed 1 Select Index print i PictBridge Highlight Index print in the Print select PictBridge menu 233 and Cay Print DPOF press gt OY The confirmation dialog shown at right index print will be displayed FG Kel 2 Fas 3 B E Aa Print 2 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options 3 Adjust printing options x Sew Choose page size border and ti
303. tervals remaining and the aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current interval At other times the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter release button halfway once the button is released the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed until the exposure meters turn off To view current interval timer settings select Interval timer shooting between shots While interval timer photography is in progress the interval timer menu will show the starting time the shooting interval and the number of intervals and shots remaining None of these items can be changed while interval timer photography is in progress BE Pausing Interval Timer Photography Interval time photography can be paused by e Pressing the button between intervals e Highlighting Start gt Pause in the interval timer menu and pressing amp e Turning the camera off and then on again if desired the memory card can be replaced while the camera is off Selecting self timer or mirror up MuP release modes e Pressing the button To resume shooting 1 Choose anew starting Ba Interval timer shooting i Choose start time trigger lt Start time Choose a new starting trigger and start time as described on page 189 2 Resume shooting Highlight Start gt Restart and press Note that if interval timer photography was
304. the Monitor Live View N m 47 EJ Recording and Viewing Movies m 57 KE Image Recording Options Focus Release Mode ISO Sensitivity Exposure K White Balance Image Enhancement Flash Photography E Other Shooting Options E More About Playback Connections Menu Guide Technical Notes m 67 a 73 wm B B B 92 m 181 Find what you re looking for using this question and answer index HE New Features Question Key phrase m How do I take high quality NEF RAW 14 bit NEF RAW 70 photos Can l use the monitor as a viewfinder Live view 47 How do I shoot movies Movies 57 How do I record photographs using two Primary slot 72 memory cards secondary slot Can control how photos are processed Picture Controls 154 How do I preserve details in shadows s PEEN and highlights Active D Lighting 164 How do focus on erratically moving 3D tracking 265 subjects How do tell if the camera is level Virtual horizon 311 Can l adjust focus separately for AF fine tune 312 different lenses How do I remove dust from the low pass Cleaning the low pass e e 358 filter protecting the image sensor filter HE Camera Setup Question Key phrase aA How do I focus the viewfinder Viewfinder focus 36 ey do I keep the monitor from turning Monitor off delay 274 How do I keep the shutter speed and 39 aperture displays from turning off Auto mieterot 273
305. the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the control panel Number of shots Fn button Main command Control panel dial WB bracketing indicator At settings other than zero a m icon and WB bracketing indicator will appear in the control panel 125 3 Select a white balance increment Pressing the Fn button rotate the sub command dial to choose the white balance adjustment Each increment is roughly equivalent to 5 mired White balance increment Fn button Sub command Control panel dial Choose from increments of 1 5 mired 2 10 mired or 3 15 mired Higher B values correspond to increased amounts of blue higher A values to increased amounts of amber QO 138 The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below No of White balance Control panel display shots increment Bracketing order EVs re EAS Qiniiwiee s O 1 0 a 1 HJF neee are 3 1B 1B 0 2B DIE foe fic 3 1A 1A 2A 0 ber Hee sirsie k d 2 1B 0 1B DIE feee TTE 2 1A O 1A JF fo TOEP Rec I 3 1A 1B 0 1A 1B GE fut 5 1A 1B 0 2A 1A 1B 2B 0 3A 2A 1A inmin Eat TF Pout 7 1A1B 1B 2B 3B 0 4A 3A 2A 1A arene Spree GF grevae 9 1A1B yey B73B 48 See Also See page 139 for a definition of mired 126 4 Framea photograph focus and 7 shoot Ca E
306. the camera or flash Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section contact a Nikon authorized service representative for more information Other Accessories At the time of writing the following accessories were available for the D300S Power sources Rechargeable Li ion Battery EN EL3e 2 22 24 Multi Power Battery Pack MB D10 The MB D10 is equipped with a shutter release button AF ON button multi selector and main and sub command dials for improved operation when taking photographs in portrait tall orientation When attaching the MB D10 remove contact cover for the MB D10 from the camera A BL 3 battery chamber cover is required when using EN EL4a or EN EL4 batteries Quick Charger MH 18a 2 22 The MH 18a can be used to recharge EN EL3e battery AC Adapter EH 5a EH 5 These AC adapters can be used to power the camera for extended periods Wireless LAN adapters Wireless Transmitter WT 4 Connects the camera to wireless and Ethernet networks The photographs on the camera memory card can be viewed by computers on the same network or copied to a computer for long term storage The camera can also be controlled from any computer on the network using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Note that the WT 4 requires an independent power source an EH 6 AC adapter or a second EN EL3e battery is recommended See the WT 4 manual for details Viewfinder eyepiece accessories
307. the card Check to be sure that the card is in the correct orientation If this is the first time the memory card will be used after being used or formatted in another device format the card as described on page 34 4 Close the card slot cover Using Two Memory Cards See page 72 for information on choosing the roles played by each card when two cards are inserted in the camera vV Memory Card Icons The memory cards currently inserted in the camera are indicated as shown the example at right shows the icons displayed when both a CompactFlash and an SD card are inserted If the memory card is full or locked or an error has occurred the icon for the affected card will blink 2 381 ICUS TOMI onre 330a ay ABT Information display EE Removing Memory Cards 1 Turn the camera off Confirm that the access lamp is off and turn the camera off 2 Remove the memory card CompactFlash memory cards Open the memory card slot cover and press the eject button to partially eject the card The memory card can then be removed by hand Do not push on the memory card while pressing the eject button Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or memory card SD memory cards Open the memory card slot cover and press the card in to eject it The memory card can then be removed by hand 33 34
308. ther the photograph would be under or over exposed at current settings if Lo or Hi is displayed in 5 or A modes the indicators show the amount of under or over exposure Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl Q 270 the amount of under or over exposure is shown in increments of 1 3 EV 1 2 EV or 1 EV If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded the displays will flash Custom Setting b2 set to 1 3 step Optimal exposure Underexposed by 3 EV Overexposed by over 2 EV Control panel ee ere a T PTEE EEA f eee Wi Eir ERES b Viewfinder 0 Reverse Indicators If hehiitiniste 9 is selected for Custom Setting f11 Reverse indicators A 299 the exposure indicators in the viewfinder control panel and information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right Select ahisihiinisk 70 to display negative values on the left and positive values on the right 113 114 Long Time Exposures At a shutter speed of tus amp the shutter will remain open while the shutter release button is held down Use for long time exposure photographs of moving lights the stars night scenery or fireworks A tripod and optional remote cord M 356 are recommended to prevent blur 1 Ready the camera Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable level surface If you
309. times of the displays may drop at low temperatures This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction 11 12 The Information Display Shooting information including shutter speed aperture the number of exposures remaining buffer capacity and AF area mode is displayed in the monitor when the ff button is pressed lt E button Turning the Monitor Off To clear shooting information from the monitor press the M button twice more or press the shutter release button halfway The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for about 10 seconds The information display can be restored by pressing the Ef button See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay 274 For information on changing the color of the lettering in the information display see Custom Setting d8 Information display 278 123 MLETIE TPF e en TRAUT 17 16 1 Exposure MOE vaesessssssssscsssssssesesenss 104 B Flexible program indicator 107 E Flash sync indicator Shutter speed Exposure compensation value Flash compensation value Number of shots in exposure flash or white balance bracketing SEQUENCE soest 121 125 Focal length non CPU lenses 197 Color temperature 141 5 Color temperature indicator 6 Aperture stop indicator 110
310. tion assigned to the AF ON button on the optional MB D10 battery pack N Option Description AF ON Pressing the MB D10 AF ON button initiates autofocus Focus and exposure lock while the MB D10 AF ON Ga AB AFlock ton is pressed Exposure locks while the MB D10 AF ON button is fia AE lock only pressed Exposure locks when the MB D10 AF ON button is AE lock Reset pressed and remains locked until the button is onrelease pressed a second time the shutter is released or the exposure meters turn off Exposure locks when the MB D10 AF ON button is 3 AE lock Hold pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off m AFlockonly Focus locks while the MB D10 AF ON button is pressed SameasFn The MB D10 AF ON button performs the function Fi button selected for Custom Setting f5 1 292 1 VR Lenses Vibration reduction can not be initiated by pressing the AF ON button 269 270 b Metering Exposure b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Select the increments used when making Bi 1150 sensitivity step value adjustments to ISO sensitivity EA step n CE T 1 2 1 2 step 1 1step b2 EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Select the increments used when making Sid 2 EV steps for exposure cnt adjustments to shutter speed aperture and z bracketing TET
311. to In aperture priority auto you choose the aperture while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure To take photographs in aperture priority auto 1 Select exposure MODE button mode A Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until A is displayed in the viewfinder and control Main command dial panel 25 F 2 Choose an aperture Rotate the sub command dial while the exposure meters are on to choose the x 5 desired aperture from Sub command dial values between the minimum and maximum for the lens Small apertures high f numbers increase depth of field see page 105 bringing both foreground and background into focus Large apertures low f numbers soften background details in portraits or other compositions that emphasize the main subject Small aperture f 36 ire aperture f 2 8 109 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot hd Non CPU Lenses M 342 Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified using the Non CPU lens data item in setup menu M 196 when a non CPU lens is attached the current f number will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel rounded to the nearest full stop Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops 4F with maximum aperture displayed as AF and the f number must be read from
312. to view photo information M 207 or press and hold the amp button to zoom in on the current frame M 218 To view six pictures at a time press the button Use the multi selector to highlight pictures or press amp to display the highlighted picture full 10003005 001 JPG NORMA 15 04 2009 10 25 07 4288x2845 frame 2 Display printing options i Setup Press to display PictBridge sii 7 inti i No of copie 1 printing options i s 4 Time stamp 4 7 3 Adjust printing options Press A or W to highlight an option and press gt to select Option Description Menu shown at right will be my Page size displayed Press A or W to choose page size to print at ao Pagesize default page size for current M printer select Printer default then press to select and return to previous menu Menu shown at right will be No of copies displayed Press A or W to No of choose number of copies copies maximum 99 then press to select and return to previous menu 230 Option Description Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or W to p Border Printer default choose print style from Printer default default for current printer Print with border print photo with white border or No border then press to select and return to previous menu Print with border Border No border Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or to cho
313. tofocus operations e Taking NEF RAW or TIFF RGB photographs e Slow shutter speeds e Using the optional WT 4 wireless transmitter e Using the optional GP 1 GPS unit e Using VR vibration reduction mode with VR lenses To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN EL3e batteries e Keep the battery contacts clean Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance e Use batteries immediately after charging Batteries will lose their charge if left unused 398 Index Symbols a Single point AF ssssssssssssssssssss 76 77 t Dynamic area AF 76 77 264 Auto area AF Self timer 86 91 Mup 86 93 amp 3 Matrix wwe 102 Center weighted 102 272 CJ Spot ne P Programmed auto ssesseeeceeeseees 106 5 Shutter priority auto ou 108 R Aperture priority auto M Manual c secsseesssecsseeees 111 Help 18 21 F Memory buffer sssssececsseeeeee 43 89 PRE Preset Manual 134 142 EB Info button Live view button ww 48 58 B SWITCH cccccssesssesssssesssessessessessessees 39 278 Numerics 1 005 pixel RGB SENSOT sseccsssseeeee T2 Ditin nann ANA 3D color matrix metering Il 3D tracking 51 points 3D tracking sesscceeseees A AWN cable AC adapter Accessories Active D Lighting Active folder Add items My Menu we 333 ADL bracket
314. tograph will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded for information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded see page 188 The icon will blink until shooting ends When shooting ends multiple exposure mode will end and the icon will no longer be displayed Repeat steps 1 7 to take additional multiple exposures m Multiple Exposure Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure Live view 1 47 can not be used to record multiple exposures The information listed in the playback photo information display including date of recording and camera orientation is for the first shot in the multiple exposure If no operations are performed for 30 s after the monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point Interval Timer Photography If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is taken the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have been taken the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting menu is ignored These exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph and multiple exposure mode and interval timer shooting will end Cancelling mu
315. ub command dial 3 3 5 Sub command dial Main command dial A Main command dial Sub command dial Ay N A 271 b5 Center Weighted Area MENU button gt Custom Settings menu When calculating exposure center weighted Option metering assigns the greatest weight toacirclein 6 gt 6mm the center of the frame The diameter of this 8 bp 8mm circle can be set to 6 8 10 or 13 mm or to the 10 610mm average of the entire frame 13 13mm Avg Average Note that the diameter is fixed at 8 mm when a non CPU lens is used b6 Fine Tune Optimal Exposure MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Use this option to fine tune the exposure E 26 Fine tune optimal exposure value selected by the camera Exposurecan be fine tuned separately for each metering y Ea Center weighted metering 0 0 method by from 1 to 1 EV in steps of 6 EV aR 2 vV Fine Tuning Exposure Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank and is not affected by two button resets Note that as the exposure compensation 4 icon is not displayed the only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine tuning menu Exposure compensation M 118 is preferred in most situations 272 c Timers AE Lock c1 Shutter Release Button AE L menu button gt Custom settingsmens At the default setting of Off exposure only Sct Shutterelease button AEL locks
316. uennsen 36 52 White balance recording Battery indicator 37 275 indicator cee 144 display can be turned off with Exposure compensation Custom Setting d3 Vell UO ranam onina 118 JH Focus indicator csemsesseenee 43 84 Flash compensation value 177 J Metering eeesssnssnsnsnaenee 102 H Flash ready indicator 171 7 Autoexposure AE IOCK ses 116 g FV lock indicator sssesssccsssesseenee 179 E Shutter Sped 108 112 17 Flash sync indicator 281 Aperture f number 109 112 g Aperture stop indicator 110 H Aperture number of stops 110 Exposure indicator sssssssesessens 113 J Exposure mode 104 Exposure compensation Gis pllay cdsscisecssnssessecsnsvosarcoscbscsstsente 118 Flash compensation indicator eee eee 177 Exposure compensation E indicator ou ceesseesssessssessseesssessseeesseens 118 BE S0 sensitivity nrremenemene 96 Auto ISO sensitivity MdicatOr iiini 99 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 EXPOSULES scssssccsssssssessssesssecseceesees 38 M No Battery When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted the display in the viewfinder will dim This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully charged battery is inserted 1 The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature and the response
317. ults The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid and lines appear parallel to the axes of the grid The Picture Control Grid Pressing the 9 button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is selected Release the 9 button to return to the Picture Control menu Previous Settings The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting Use this as a reference when adjusting settings Filter Effects Monochrome Only The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs The following filter effects are available Option Description Yellow Enhances contrast Can be used to tone down the brightness of Orange the sky in landscape photographs Orange produces more Red contrast than yellow red more contrast than orange ai D o lt Green Softens skin tones Can be used for portraits Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters Toning Monochrome Only Pressing W when Toning is selected displays saturation options Press lt or gt to adjust O sharpening saturation Saturation contr
318. ups ID cards and tickets such as passes and meal coupons Comply with copyright notices The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as books music paintings woodcuts prints maps drawings movies and photographs is governed by national and international copyright laws Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry Only Nikon brand electronic accessories including battery chargers batteries AC adapters and flash accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry The use of non Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nikon warranty The use of third party rechargeable Li ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal on Nikon Niki PIN UONIN uo shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating igniting rupturing or leaking For more information about Nikon brand accessories contact a local authorized Nikon dealer xxiii Before Taking Important Pictures Before taking pictures on important occasions such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a
319. ure mode flash fires just before the shutter slow closes Use to create effect of a stream of light behind moving objects In programmed auto and aperture priority auto slow rear curtain sync is used to capture both subject and background Use of tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake 175 m Flash Control Mode The information display shows the flash control mode for the built in flash Built in and for optional flash units attached to the camera accessory shoe Optional as follows Auto aperture AA ae non TTL auto flash A IL Built in Optional Built in Optional Built in Optional JA jams JA TTL m mi 1 i R a Auto FP A 281 TTL FP FP FP 4 aa Repeating flash RPT RPT 2 A a 4 4 R Commander mode TTL lin w w o CMD CMD 1 Available with SB 900 and SB 800 only 2 Flash control mode for built in flash can be selected using Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash V 283 I See Also See Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 281 for information on flash sync speeds as fast as 1 320 s 176 Flash Compensation Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from 3EV to 1EV in increments of 3EV changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background Flash output can be increased to make the
320. ure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock Do not handle the plug or charger with wet hands Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock Do not use with travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one voltage to another or with DC to AC inverters Failure to observe this precaution could damage the product or cause overheating or fire A Use appropriate cables When connecting cables to the input and output jacks use only the cables provided or sold by Nikon for the purpose to maintain compliance with product regulations ZA CD ROMs CD ROMs containing software or manuals should not be played back on audio CD equipment Playing CD ROMs on an audio CD player could cause hearing loss or damage the equipment ZA Observe caution when using the flash Using the camera with the flash in close contact with the skin or other objects could cause burns Using the flash close to the subject s eyes could cause temporary visual impairment Particular care should be observed when photographing infants when the flash should be no less than one meter 39 in from the subject A Avoid contact with liquid crystal Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth Notices No part of the manuals included with this product may b
321. ustom Picture Controls The preset Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card renamed or deleted 163 Active D Lighting Active D Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows creating photographs with natural contrast Use for high contrast scenes for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day gt Active D Lighting off Active D Lighting gaam Auto gt Active D Lighting off Active D Lighting amp H High 164 To use active D Lighting 1 Select Active D Lighting MENU button To display the menus press the MENU button Highlight _ n P Y ite balance Active D Lighting in the Ne I Set Picture Control 4 Manage Picture Control shooting menu and press gt Color space sree Active Diishting ag E Long ex NR OFF 2 Choose an option Active Dlishting ao Highlight sw Auto amp H Extra p n i A i oa mi H High high H High N Normal u a t L Low or Off and press If Bs tos gun Auto is selected the a camera will automatically adjust Active D Lighting according to shooting conditions in exposure mode M however amp Auto is equivalent to E N Normal M Active D Lighting Matrix metering is recommended M 102 When Active D Lighting is on noise graininess banding and mottling may appear in photogr
322. view mode Sound of mirror clicking down when shutter release button was pressed halfway in hand held mode was mistaken for sound of shutter 1 54 e Unless Release is chosen for Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection shutter release is disabled if camera is unable to focus when focus mode S is selected in hand held mode M 54 264 Randomly spaced bright pixels reddish areas or other irregularities noise appear in photos e Choose lower ISO sensitivity or use high ISO noise reduction M 96 259 Shutter speed is slower than 8 s use long exposure noise reduction CO 258 e Reddish areas or other artifacts appear in long time exposures turn long exposure noise reduction on when shooting at a shutter speed of too bi CO 258 AF assist illuminator does not light Camera is in focus mode C M 74 e Center focus point is not selected for single point AF or dynamic area AF CQ 76 Off selected for Custom Setting a9 Built in AF assist illuminator CO 268 Illuminator has turned off automatically Illuminator may become hot with continued use wait for lamp to cool down Photos are blotched or smeared Clean lens e Clean low pass filter 1 358 Colors are unnatural Adjust white balance to match light source M 134 Adjust Set Picture Control settings M 154 Can not measure white balance Subject is too dark or too bright Q 145 Image can not be selected as source for preset w
323. way down again to take a picture To prevent blurring caused by camera movement press the shutter release button smoothly or use an optional remote cord M 356 The mirror lowers when shooting ends Mirror up Mode A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s after the mirror is raised 93 p 94 ISO Sensitivity Reacting Faster to Light ISO sensitivity is the digital equivalent of film speed The higher the ISO sensitivity the less light needed to make an exposure allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures This chapter describes how to set ISO sensitivity manually and automatically Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manuallly c sscscssssssssseseee 96 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ssessssssecssescsccscseoscscosesscscosese 98 95 Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 200 and ISO 3200 in steps equivalent to 3 EV Settings of from about 0 3 to 1 EV below ISO 200 and 0 3 to 1 EV above ISO 3200 are also available for special situations ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by pressing the ISO button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder ISO button Main command dial Poo ISO Iso Control panel Viewfinder ISO sensitivity 3200 96 The ISO Sensitivity Menu TS _SHOOTINGMENU ISO sensit
324. when the AE L AF L button is pressed If On is selected exposure will also lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway c2 Auto Meter off Delay MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose how long the camera continues to 2 Auto meterotf delay meter exposure when no operations are performed The shutter speed and aperture displays in the control panel and viewfinder turn off automatically when the exposure meters turn off Choose a shorter meter off delay for longer battery life When the camera is powered by an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter the auto meter off delay is equivalent to No limit c3 Self Timer MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the length of the shutter release E co Selttimer delay in self timer mode 273 274 c4 Monitor off Delay MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose how long the monitor remains on E c4 Monitor off delay when no operations are performed during r playback Playback defaults to 10 s and C oned image review Image review defaults to 4s amp spect or when menus Menus defaults to 20 s or information Information display defaults to 10 s are displayed Choose a shorter monitor off delay for longer battery life Regardless of the setting chosen the monitor remains on if no operations are performed for about ten minutes when the camera is powered by an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter 2 d Shooting Display d1 Bee
325. y charged Depending on your location it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice On cold days the capacity of batteries tends to decrease Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary Once warmed a cold battery may recover some of its charge Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance Used batteries are a valuable resource Please recycle used batteries in accord with local regulations Defaults The default settings for the options in the camera menus are listed below For information on two button resets see page 182 BE Playback Menu Defaults Option Default Playback folder 1 244 D300S Image review M 251 Off After delete N 251 Show next Rotate tall V 251 Off Slide show M 252 Frame interval M 252 2s BE Shooting Menu Defaults Option Default File naming 1 258 DSC Primary slot selection M 72 CF card slot Secondary slot function Q 72 Overflow Image quality 1 68 JPEG normal Image size Q 71 Large JPEG compression M 70 Size priority NEF RAW recording 2 70 Type Lossless compressed NEF RAW bit depth 12 bit White balance GQ 134 Auto Fine tuning 2 137 Off Choose color temp V 141 5000 K Set Picture
326. y find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual Camera Body 8 Release mode dial esses 87 8 BS 1 accessory shoe covet 347 i Release mode dial 9 Power SWItCH veeesecscsccssseesseccsceeene 37 39 lock release eessessssssssecsssessseesseessne 87 g Shutter release button 43 44 QUAL image quality size exposure compensation DUTTON esiseina 69 71 D ts innri 118 Two button reset button 182 Two button reset button 182 4 Eyelet for camera strap MODE exposure mode WB white balance DUtCOM i cisesscscsssoconnssgessssensasasecaosodences DUTTON sssssssssesssesseseseerse 135 140 141 nm format button 6 ISO ISO sensitivity button 96 13 Eyelet for camera strap Accessory shoe 14 Focal plane mark 6 csscssssssssssee 84 for optional flash Unit 0 347 JH Control pare ercvnerseeetenene 8 Camera Body Continued 18 BB Built in flash on ecsssesenenese 171 BY AV connector nessssssesnetnenee 239 JE Flash pop up button 171 J HDMI mini pin connector 241 4 flash mode button 0 171 Connector for external flash compensation a MICFOPNONE sesssssssessssesceseccessees 58 62 PUBL cssessaziccesaisssesescccesstiesacecastnans 177 DC IN connector for optional AC 4 Built in microphone 59 62 K ad

Nikon D300s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents